240
This document reproduces the complete and unabridged text of a United States Army Field Manual first published by the Department of the Army, Washington DC. All source material contained in the reproduced document has been approved for public release and unlimited distribution by an agency of the US Government. Any US Government markings in this reproduction that indicate limited distribution or classified material have been superseded by downgrading instructions that were promulgated by an agency of the US government after the original publication of the document. No US government agency is associated with the publishing of this reproduction. Digital viewer interface reformatting, viewer interface bookmarks and viewer interface links were revised, edited, ammended, and or provided for this edition by I.L. Holdridge. This page and the viewer interface reformatting © I.L. Holdridge 1999. All rights reserved.

Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

This document reproduces the complete and unabridged text of aUnited States Army Field Manual first published by the Department

of the Army, Washington DC.

All source material contained in the reproduced document has beenapproved for public release and unlimited distribution by an agency

of the US Government. Any US Government markings in thisreproduction that indicate limited distribution or classified material

have been superseded by downgrading instructions that werepromulgated by an agency of the US government after the original

publication of the document.

No US government agency is associated with the publishing of thisreproduction.

Digital viewer interface reformatting, viewer interface bookmarksand viewer interface links were revised, edited, ammended, and or

provided for this edition by I.L. Holdridge.

This page and the viewer interface reformatting© I.L. Holdridge 1999.

All rights reserved.

Page 2: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

FM 21-20C1

HEADQUARTERSCHANGE 1 DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

Washington, DC, 1 October 1998

PHYSICAL FITNESS TRAINING

1. Change FM 21-20, 30 September 1992, as follows:

REMOVE OLD PAGES INSERT NEW PAGES

14-3 to 14-8 14-3 to 14-8.214-21 to 14-22 14-21 to 14-22

2. A star (*) marks new or changed material.

3. File this transmittal sheet in front of this publication.

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: proved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Page 3: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Physical Fitness Training

Page 4: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

CHAPTER 13

CHAPTER 14

APPENDIX A

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)

PAGE

INJURIESTypical Injuries Associated withPhysical Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ..13-1Other Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . ..13-2

ARMY PHYSICAL FITNESS TESTMethods of Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .14-1Over-Forty Cardiovascular ScreeningProgram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..14-lOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ..l4-2Test Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..l4-2Duties of Test Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...14-8Test Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...i4-9Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l4-10Test Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l4-11Test Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .l4-18Scores Above Maximum. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .14-19Temporary Profiles . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..14-20Permanent Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..14-20Alternate Events . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-20

PHYSIOLOGICAL DIFFERENCES

BETWEEN THE SEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..A-O

APPENDIX B

APPENDIX C

APPENDIX D

APPENDIX E

APPENDIX F

APPENDIX G

APPENDIX H

PAGE

POSITIVE PROFILE FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. B-0

PHYSICAL FITNESS LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. C-I

STATIONARY BICYCLE TEST . . . . . . . . . . .. D-O

SELECTING THE RIGHTRUNNING SHOE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...E-1

CALCULATION OF V02MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. F-1

PERCEIVED EXERTION . . . . . . . . . . . .G-1

THE MAJOR SKELETAL MUSCLESOF THE HUMAN BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. H-O

GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1

REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. References-O

INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Index-O

ii

Page 5: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Preface On 5 July 1950, U.S. troops, who were unpreparedfor the physical demands of war, were sent to battle. Theearly days of the Korean war were nothing short ofdisastrous, as U.S. soldiers were routed by a poorlyequipped, but well-trained, North Korean People’s Army.As American soldiers withdrew, they left behindwounded comrades and valuable equipment theirtraining had not adequately prepared them to carryheavy loads.

The costly lessons learned by Task Force Smith inKorea are as important today as ever. If we fail toprepare our soldiers for their physically demandingwartime tasks, we are guilty of paying lip service to theprinciple of “Train as you fight.” Our physical trainingprograms must do more for our soldiers than just getthem ready for the semiannual Army Physical FitnessTest (APFT’).

FM 21 -20 is directed at leaders who plan andconduct physical fitness training. It provides guidelines

for developing programs which will improve and maintain physical fitness levels for all Army personnel.These programs will help leaders prepare their soldiers to meet the physical demands of war. This manual canalso be used as a source book by all soldiers. FM 21-20 was written to conform to the principles outlined inFM 25-100, Training the Force.

The benefits to be derived from a good physical fitness program are many. It can reduce the number ofsoldiers on profile and sick call, invigorate training, and enhance productivity and mental alertness. A goodphysical fitness program also promotes team cohesion and combat survivability. It will improve soldiers’combat readiness.

The proponent of this publication is HQ TRADOC. Send comments and recommendations on DA Form2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) directly to Headquarters, US Army InfantryCenter, US Army Physical Fitness School (ATZB-PF), Fort Benning, GA31905-5000.

Unless this publication states otherwise, masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men.

i i i

Page 6: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

A soldier’s level of physical fitness' has a direct impact on his combatreadiness. The many battles in whichAmerican troops have fought under-score the important role physical fit-ness plays on the battlefield. Therenewed nationwide interest in fitnesshas been accompanied by many re-search studies on the effects of regularparticipation in sound physical fitnessprograms. The overwhelming conclu-sion is that such programs enhance aperson’s quality of life, improve pro-ductivity, and bring about positivephysical and mental changes. Not onlyare physically fit soldiers essential tothe Army, they are also more likely tohave enjoyable, productive lives.

This chapter provides an overviewof fitness. It defines physical fitness,outlines the phases of fitness, anddiscusses various types of fitness pro-grams and fitness evaluation. Com-manders and leaders can use this infor-mation to develop intelligent, combat-related, physical fitness programs.

Physical fitness, the emphasis ofthis manual, is but one component oftotal fitness. Some of the “others areweight control, diet and nutrition,stress management, dental health, andspiritual and ethical fitness, as well asthe avoidance of hypertension, sub-stance abuse, and tobacco use. Thismanual is primarily concerned withissues relating directly to the develop-ment and maintenance of the fivecomponents of physical fitness.

The Army’s physical fitness train-ing program extends to all branches ofthe total Army. This includes theUSAR and ARNG and encompasses allages and ranks and both sexes. Itspurpose is to physically condition allsoldiers throughout their careers be-ginning with initial entry training (IET).It also includes soldiers with limitingphysical profiles who must also par-ticipate in physical fitness training.

Commanders and leaders must en-sure that all soldiers in their unitsmaintain the highest level of physical

fitness in accordance with this manualand with AR 350-15 which prescribespolicies, procedures, and responsibili-ties for the Army physical fitnessprogram.

Leadership Responsibilities

Components of physical fitness include weight control, diet, nutrition, stress management, and spiritual and ethical fitness.

Effective leadership is critical tothe success of a good physical trainingprogram. Leaders, especially seniorleaders, must understand and practicethe new Army doctrine of physical fit-ness. They must be visible and activeparticipants in physical training pro-grams. In short, leaders must lead PT!Their example will emphasize theimportance of physical fitness trainingand will highlight it as a key elementof the unit’s training mission.

Leaders must emphasize the valueof physical training and clearly ex-plain the objectives and benefits of theprogram. Master Fitness Trainers(MFTs), graduates of a special coursetaught by the U.S. Army PhysicalFitness School, can help commandersdo this. However, regardless of thelevel of technical experience MFTshave, the sole responsibility for goodprograms rests with leaders at everylevel.

A poorly designed and executedphysical fitness program hurts morale.A good program is well planned andorganized, has reasonable yet chal-lenging requirements, and is competi-tive and progressive. It also hascommand presence at every level withleaders setting the example for theirsoldiers.

Leaders should also continually as-sess their units to determine whichspecific components of fitness theylack. Once they identify the short-comings, they should modify theirprograms to correct the weaknesses.

Leaders should not punish soldierswho fail to perform to standard.Punishment, especially excessive repe-titions or additional PT, often doesmore harm than good. Leaders must

1-1

Page 7: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

plan special training to help soldierswho need it. The application of soundleadership techniques is especiallyimportant in bringing physically defi-cient soldiers up to standard.

‘COMMAND FUNCTIONS

Commanders must evaluate the ef-fectiveness of physical fitness trainingand ensure that it is focused on theunit’s missions. They can evaluate itseffectiveness by participating in andobserving training, relating their fit-ness programs to the unit’s missions,and analyzing individual and unit APFTperformance.

Leaders should regularly measurethe physical fitness level of everysoldier to evaluate his progress and de-termine the success of the unit’s pro-gram.

Commanders should assure thatqualified leaders supervise and con-duct fitness training and use theirMFTs, for they have received compre-hensive training in this area.

Commanders must ensure that the timealloted for physicalfitness training is used effectively.

Training times is wasted by the fol-lowing: • Unprepared or unorganized lead-ers. • Assignment fo a group which us toolarge for one leader. • Insufficient training intensity: itwill result in no improvement. • Rates of progression that are tooslow or too fast. • Extreme faomality that usuallyemphasizes form over substance.An example would be too many units runs at slow paces or "dailydozen" activities that look impres-sive but do not result in impove-ment. • Inadequate facilities which causelong waiting periods between exer-cises during a workout and/or be-t w e e n w o r k o u t s . • Long rest periods which interferew i t h p r o g r e s s .

Leaders can learn about fitness train-i n g i n t h e f o l l o w i n g w a y s :• Attend the four-week MFT course o r one-week Exerc i se Leaders Course. • Request a fitness workshop fromthe Army Physical Fitness School.• Become familiar with the Army'sfitness publications. Important ex-amples include this manual , AR350-15, and DA Pamphlets 350-15,350-18, and 350-22.

Commanders must provide adequatefacilities and funds to support a pro-gram which will improve each soldier’slevel of physical fitness. They mustalso be sure that everyone participates,since all individuals, regardless of rank,age, or sex, benefit from regular exer-cise. In some instances, leaders willneed to make special efforts to over-come recurring problems which inter-fere with regular training.

Leaders must also make special ef-forts to provide the correct fitnesstraining for soldiers who are physi-cally substandard. “Positive profiling”(DA Form 3349) permits and encour-ages profiled soldiers to do as much asthey can within the limits of theirprofiles. Those who have been awayfrom the conditioning process becauseof leave, sickness, injury, or travelmay also need special consideration.

Commanders must ensure that thetime allotted for physical fitness train-ing is used effectively.

To foster a positive attitude, unitleaders and instructors must be knowl-edgeable, understanding, and fair, butdemanding. They must recognizeindividual differences and motivatesoldiers to put forth their best efforts.However, they must also emphasizetraining to standard. Attaining a highlevel of physical fitness cannot bedone simply by going through the mo-tions. Hard training is essential.

Commanders must ensure that lead-e rs a re familiar with approved

1-2

Page 8: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

techniques, directives, and publica-tions and that they use them. The ob-jective of every commander should beto incorporate the most effective meth-ods of physical training into a balancedprogram. This program should resultin the improved physical fitness oftheir soldiers and an enhanced abilityto perform mission-related tasks.

MFTs can help commanders formu-late sound programs that will attaintheir physical training goals, but com-manders must know and apply thedoctrine. However, since the respon-sibility for physical training is thecommander’s, programs must be basedon his own training objectives. Thesehe must develop from his evaluation ofthe unit’s mission-essential task list(METL). Chapter 10 describes thedevelopment of the unit’s program.

The components of physical fitnessare as fol lows: • Cardiorespiratory (CR) endurance-the e f f i c i ency wi th which the body delivers oxygen and nutrients needed for muscular activity and transports waste products from the cells. • Muscular strength - the greatestamount of force a muscle or musclegroup can exert in a single effort.• Muscular endurance - the ability of a muscle or muscle group to per-form repeated movements with a sub-maximal force for extended periods of times. • Flexibility-the ability to move the joints (for example, elbow, knee) orany group of joints through an entire, normal range of motion.• Body composition-the amount of body fat a soldier has in compari-son to his total body mass.

MASTER FITNESS TRAINERS

A Master Fitness Trainer (MFT) isa soldier who has completed either thefour-week active-component, two-week reserve-component, or U.S.Military Academy’s MFT course work.Although called “masters,” MFTs aresimply soldiers who know about all as-pects of physical fitness training andhow soldiers’ bodies function. Mostimportantly, since MFTs are taught todesign individual and unit programs,they should be used by commanders asspecial staff assistants for this purpose.

Components of Fitness

Physical fitness is the ability to func-tion effectively in physical work, train-ing, and other activities and still haveenough energy left over to handle anyemergencies which may arise.

MFTs can do the fo l lowing : • Assess the physical fitness levels of individuals and units. • Analyze the unit's mission-related tasks and develop sound fitness training programs to support those tasks. • Train other trainers to conduct sound,safe physical training. • Understand the structure and func-tion of the human body, especially a s i t r e l a t e s t o e x e r c i s e .

Improving the first three compo-nents of fitness listed above will havea positive impact on body compositionand will result in less fat. Excessivebody fat detracts from the other fit-ness components, reduces perform-ance, detracts from appearance, andnegatively affects one’s health.

Factors such as speed, agility, musclepower, eye-hand coordination, andeye-foot coordination are classified ascomponents of “motor” fitness. Thesefactors affect a soldier’s survivabilityon the battlefield. Appropriate train-ing can improve these factors withinthe limits of each soldier’s potential.The Army’s fitness program seeks toimprove or maintain all the compo-nents of physical and motor fitness

1-3

Page 9: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

through sound, progressive, mission-specific physical training for indi-viduals and units.

Principles of Exercise

Adherence to certain basic exerciseprinciples is important for developingan effective program. The principlesof exercise apply to everyone at alllevels of physical training, from theOlympic-caliber athlete to the week-end jogger. They also apply to fitnesstraining for military personnel.

These basic principles of exercisemust be followed:

Factors for a successful training program are Frequency, Intensity, Time, and Type; "FITT".

e

Regularity. To achieve a trainingeffect, a person must exercise often. One should strive to exerciseeach of the first four fitness com-ponents at least three times a week.Infrequent exercise can do moreharm than good. Regularity isalso important in resting, sleeping,and following a good diet.Progression. The intensity (howhard) and/or duration (how long)of exercise must gradually in-crease to improve the level of fit-ness.Balance. To be effective, a pro-gram should include activities thataddress all the fitness compo-nents, since overemphasizing anyone of them may hurt the others.Variety. Providing a variety of ac-tivities reduces boredom and in-creases motivation and progress.Specificity. Training must begeared toward specific goals. Forexample, soldiers become betterrunners if their training empha-sizes running. Although swim-ming is great exercise, it does notimprove a 2-mile-run time asmuch as a running program does.Recovery. A hard day of trainingfor a given component of fitnessshould be followed by an easiertraining day or rest day for thatcomponent and/or muscle group(s)to help permit recovery. Another

way to allow recovery is to alternatethe muscle groups exercised everyother day, especially when trainingfor strength and/or muscle endur-ance.Overload. The work load of eachexercise session must exceed thenormal demands placed on the bodyin order to bring about a trainingeffect.

FITT Factors

Certain factors must be part of anyfitness training program for it to besuccessful. These factors are Fre-quency, Intensity, Time, and Type.The acronym FITT makes it easier toremember them. (See Figure 1- 1.)

FREQUENCY

Army Regulation 350-15 specifiesthat vigorous physical fitness trainingwill be conducted 3 to 5 times perweek. For optimal results, command-ers must strive to conduct 5 days ofphysical training per week. Ideally, atleast three exercise sessions for CRfitness, muscle endurance, musclestrength, and flexibility should beperformed each week to improve fit-ness levels. Thus, for example, toobtain maximum gains in muscularstrength, soldiers should have at leastthree strength-training sessions perweek. Three physical activity periodsa week, however, with only one sessioneach of cardiorespiratory, strength,and flexibility training will not im-prove any of these three components.

With some planning, a training pro-gram for the average soldier can bedeveloped which provides fairly equalemphasis on all the components ofphysical fitness. The following train-ing program serves as an example.

In the first week, Monday, Wednes-day, and Friday are devoted to CRfitness, and Tuesday and Thursday aredevoted to muscle endurance andstrength. During the second week, the

1-4

Page 10: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 1-1

training days are flip-flopped: muscleendurance and strength are trained onMonday, Wednesday, and Friday, andCR fitness is trained on Tuesday andThursday. Stretching exercises aredone in every training session to en-hance flexibility. By training continu-ously in this manner, equal emphasis

can be given to developing muscularendurance and strength and to CRfitness while training five days perweek.

If the unit’s mission requires it,some muscular and some CR trainingcan be done during each daily trainingsession as long as a “hard day/recovery

1-5

Page 11: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

day” approach is used. For example, ifa unit has a hard run on Monday,Wednesday, and Friday, it may alsochoose to run on Tuesday and Thurs-day. However, on Tuesday and Thurs-day the intensity and/or distance/timeshould be reduced to allow recovery.Depending on the time available foreach session and the way trainingsessions are conducted, all componentsof fitness can be developed using athree-day-per-week schedule. How-ever, a five-day-per-week program ismuch better than three per week. (SeeTraining Program in Chapter 10.)

Numerous other approaches can betaken when tailoring a fitness programto meet a unit’s mission as long as theprinciples of exercise are not violated.Such programs, when coupled withgood nutrition, will help keep soldiersfit to win.

!NTENSITY

Training at the right intensity is thebiggest problem in unit programs. Theintensity should vary with the type ofexercise being done. Exercise for CRdevelopment must be strenuous enoughto elevate the heart rate to between 60and 90 percent of the heart rate reserve(HRR). (The calculation of percentHRR is explained in Chapter 2.) Thosewith low fitness levels should startexercising at a lower training heartrate (THR) of about 60 percent ofHRR.

For muscular strength and endur-ance, intensity refers to the percentageof the maximum resistance that is usedfor a given exercise. When determin-ing intensity in a strength-trainingprogram, it is easier to refer to a“repetition maximum” or “RM.” Forexample, a 1O-RM is the maximumweight that can be correctly lifted 10times. An 8-12 RM is the weight thatcan be lifted 8 to 12 times correctly.Doing an exercise “correctly” meansmoving the weight steadily and withproper form without getting help from

other muscle groups by jerking, bend-ing, or twisting the body. For theaverage person who wants to improveboth muscular strength and endurance,an 8-12 RM is best.

The person who wants to concen-trate on muscular strength should useweights which let him do three to sevenrepetitions before his muscles fatigue.Thus, for strength development, theweight used should be a 3-7 RM. Onthe other hand, the person who wantsto concentrate on muscular enduranceshould use a 12+ RM. When using a 12+RM as the training intensity, the morerepetitions performed per set, overtime, the greater will be the improve-ment in muscular endurance. Con-versely, the greater the number ofrepetitions performed, the smaller willbe the gains in strength. For example,a person who regularly trains with aweight which lets him do 100 repeti-tions per exercise (a 1OO-RM) greatlyincreases his muscular endurance butminimally improves his muscularstrength. (See Chapter 3 for informa-tion on resistance training.)

All exercise sessions should includestretching during the warm-up andcool-down. One should stretch sothere is slight discomfort, but nopain, when the movement is takenbeyond the normal range of motion.(See Chapter 4 for information onstretching.)

All exercises sessions

should include

stretching during

the warm-up and cool-

down.

TIME

Like intensity, the time spent exer-cising depends on the type of exercisebeing done. At least 20 to 30 continu-ous minutes of intense exercise must beused in order to improve cardiorespi-ratory endurance.

For muscular endurance and strength,exercise time equates to the number ofrepetitions done. For the averagesoldier, 8 to 12 repetitions with enoughresistance to cause muscle failureimproves both muscular endurance andstrength. As soldiers progress, they

1-6

Page 12: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

will make better strength gains bydoing two or three sets of each resis-tance exercise.

Flexibility exercises or stretchesshould be held for varying times de-pending on the objective of the session.For warming-up, such as before a run,each stretch should be held for 10 to 15seconds. To improve flexibility, it isbest to do stretching during the cool-down, with each stretch held for 30 to60 seconds. If flexibility improvementis a major goal, at least one session perweek should be devoted to developingit.

TYPE

Type refers to the kind of exerciseperformed. When choosing the type,the commander should consider theprinciple of specificity. For example,to improve his soldiers’ levels of CRfitness (the major fitness component inthe 2-mile run), he should have themdo CR types of exercises. These arediscussed in Chapter 2.

Ways to train for muscular strengthand endurance are addressed in Chap-ter 3, while Chapter 4 discusses flexi-bility. These chapters will help com-manders design programs which aretailor-made to their soldiers’ needs.The basic rule is that to improveperformance, one must practice theparticular exercise, activity, or skill hewants to improve. For example, to begood at push-ups, one must do push-ups. No other exercise will improvepush-up performance as effectively.

Warm-up and Cool-Down

One must prepare the body beforetaking part in organized PT, unit sportscompetition, or vigorous physical ac-tivity. A warm-up may help preventinjuries and maximize performance.The warm-up increases the body’sinternal temperature and the heart rate.T h e c h a n c e o f getting injureddecreases when the heart, muscles,

ligaments, and tendons are properlyprepared for exertion. A warm-upshould include some running-in-placeor slow jogging, stretching, and calis-thenics. It should last five to sevenminutes and should occur just beforethe CR or muscular endurance andstrength part of the workout. After aproper warm-up, soldiers are readyfor a more intense conditioning activ-ity.

Soldiers should cool down properlyafter each exercise period, regardlessof the type of workout. The cool-down serves to gradually slow theheart rate and helps prevent pooling ofthe blood in the legs and feet. Duringexercise, the muscles squeeze the bloodthrough the veins. This helps returnthe blood to the heart. After exercise,however, the muscles relax and nolonger do this, and the blood canaccumulate in the legs and feet. Thiscan cause a person to faint. A goodcool-down will help avoid this possi-bility.

Soldiers should walk and stretchuntil their heart rates return to lessthan 100 beats per minute (BPM) andheavy sweating stops. This usuallyhappens five to seven minutes afterthe conditioning session.

Phases ofFitness Conditioning

The physical fitness training pro-gram is divided into three phases:preparatory, conditioning, and main-tenance. The starting phases fordifferent units or individuals varydepending on their age, fitness levels,and previous physical activity.

Young, healthy persons may be ableto start with the conditioning phase,while those who have been exercisingregularly may already be in the main-tenance phase. Factors such as ex-tended field training, leave time, andillness can cause soldiers to drop froma maintenance to a conditioning phase.

1-7

Page 13: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Persons who have not been active,especially if they are age 40 or older,should start with the preparatory phase.Many soldiers who fall into this cate-gory may be recovering from illness orinjury, or they may be just out of highschool. Most units will have soldiers inall three phases of training at the sametime.

PREPARATORY PHASE

The preparatory phase helps boththe cardiorespiratory and muscularsystems get used to exercise, preparingthe body to handle the conditioningphase. The work load in the beginningmust be moderate. Progression from alower to a higher level of fitnessshould be achieved by gradual, plannedincreases in frequency, intensity, andtime.

Initially, poorly conditioned sol-diers should run, or walk if need be,three times a week at a comfortablepace that elevates their heart rate toabout 60 percent HRR for 10 to 15minutes. Recovery days should beevenly distributed throughout the week,and training should progress slowly.Soldiers should continue at this or anappropriate level until they have noundue fatigue or muscle soreness theday following the exercise. Theyshould then lengthen their exercisesession to 16 to 20 minutes and/orelevate their heart rate to about 70percent HRR by increasing their pace.To be sure their pace is faster, theyshould run a known distance and try tocover it in less time. Those who feelbreathless or whose heart rate risesbeyond their training heart rate (THR)while running should resume walkinguntil the heart rate returns to the cor-rect training level. When they canhandle an intensity of 70 percent HRRfor 20 to 25 minutes, they should beready for the next phase. Chapter 2shows how to determine the THR, thatis, the right training level during aero-bic training.

The preparatory phase for improv-ing muscular endurance and strengththrough weight training should starteasily and progress gradually. Begin-ning weight trainers should select about8 to 12 exercises that work all thebody’s major muscle groups. Theyshould use only very light weights thefirst week (that is, the first two to threeworkouts). This is very important, asthey must first learn the proper formfor each exercise. Light weights willalso help minimize muscle soreness anddecrease the likelihood of injury to themuscles, joints, and ligaments. Duringthe second week, they should use pro-gressively heavier weights on eachresistance exercise. By the end of thesecond week (four to six workouts),they should know how much weightwill let them do 8 to 12 repetitions tomuscle failure for each exercise.this point the conditioning phasegins.

CONDITIONING PHASE

Atbe-

To reach the desired level of fitness,soldiers must increase the amount ofexercise and/or the workout intensityas their strength and/or enduranceincreases.

To improve cardiorespiratory en-durance, for example, they must in-crease the length of time they run.They should start with the preparatoryphase and gradually increase the run-ning time by one or two minutes eachweek until they can run continuouslyfor 20 to 30 minutes. At this point,they can increase the intensity untilthey reach the desired level of fitness.They should train at least three times aweek and take no more than two daysbetween workouts.

For weight trainers, the condition-ing phase normally begins during thethird week. They should do one set of8 to 12 repetitions for each of theselected resistance exercises. Whenthey can do more than 12 repetitions ofany exercise, they should increase the

Soldiers and units should be encouraged to progress beyond minimum requirements.

1-8

Page 14: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

weight used on that exercise by aboutfive percent so they can again do only8 to 12 repetitions. This processcontinues throughout the conditioningphase. As long as they continue toprogress and get stronger while doingonly one set of each exercise, it is notnecessary for them to do more than oneset per exercise. When they stopmaking progress with one set, theyshould add another set on those exer-cises in which progress has slowed. Astraining progresses, they may want toincrease the sets to three to help pro-mote further increases in strength and/or muscle mass.

For maximum benefit, soldiers shoulddo strength training three times a weekwith 48 hours of rest between workoutsfor any given muscle group. It helps toperiodically do a different type ofexercise for a given muscle or musclegroup. This adds variety and ensuresbetter strength development.

The conditioning phase ends when asoldier is physically mission-capableand all personal, strength-related goalsand unit-fitness goals have been met.

MAINTENANCE PHASE

The maintenance phase sustains thehigh level of fitness achieved in theconditioning phase. The emphasis hereis no longer on progression. A well-designed, 45- to 60-minute workout(including warm-up and cool-down) atthe right intensity three times a weekis enough to maintain almost any ap-propriate level of physical fitness. Theseworkouts give soldiers time to stabalizetheir flexibility, CR endurance, andmuscular endurance and strength.However, more frequent training maybe needed to reach and maintain peakfitness levels.

Soldiers and units should always beencouraged to progress beyond mini-mum requirements. Maintaining anoptimal level of fitness should becomepart of every soldier’s life-style and

should be continued throughout hislife.

An effective program uses a varietyof activities to develop muscular en-durance and strength, CR endurance,and flexibility, and to achieve goodbody composition. It should also pro-mote the development of coordinationas well as basic physical skills. (SeeChapter 10 for guidance in construct-ing a unit program.)

Types of Fitness Programs

The Army has too many types ofunits with different missions to haveone single fitness program for every-one. Therefore, only broad categoriesof programs and general considera-tions are covered here. They areclassified as unit, individual, and specialprograms.

UNIT PROGRAMS

Unit programs must support unitmissions. A single unit may requireseveral types of programs. Some units,such as infantry companies, have gen-erally the same types of soldiers andMOSS. On the other hand, certaincombat--service-support units havemany different types of soldiers, eachwith unique needs. Commanders candevelop programs for their own unitby following the principles in thischapter. MFTs know how to helpcommanders develop programs for theirunits/soldiers.

Commanders of units composed ofboth men and women must also under-stand the physiological differencesbetween the sexes. These are summa-rized in Appendix A. Although womenare able to participate in the samefitness programs as men, they mustwork harder to perform at the sameabsolute level of work or exercise.The same holds true for poorly-con-ditioned soldiers running with well-conditioned soldiers.

To overcome this problem in thecase of running, for example, the unit

1-9

Page 15: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

should use ability group runs ratherthan unit runs. Soldiers in a givenability group will run at a set pace,with groups based on each soldier’smost recent 2-mile-run time. Threeto six groups per company-sized unitare usually enough. Within eachgroup, each soldier’s heart rate whilerunning should be at his own THR.When the run is not intense enough tobring one or more of the soldiers toTHR, it is time for those soldiers tomove up to the next ability group.

Ability group running does twothings more effectively than unit runs:1) it lets soldiers improve to theirhighest attainable fitness level; and, 2)it more quickly brings subpar per-formers up to minimum standards.

Additional training should not be

used as punishment for a soldier's inability to perform well.

It also allows soldiers to train toexcel on the APFT which, in turn,helps promotion opportunities. Hold-ing a fit soldier back by making himrun at a slow, unit-run pace (normallyless than his minimum pace for the 2-mile run on the APFT) hurts hismorale and violates the principle oftraining to challenge.

initial Entry Training (lET)

The training program in basic train-ing (BT) brings soldiers up to the levelof physical fitness they need to dotheir jobs as soldiers. However, theprogram requires good cadre leader-ship to ensure that it is appropriate,demanding, and challenging.

Trainees report to active duty atvarious levels of physical fitness andability. During basic training theypass through the preparatory into theconditioning phase. During “fill” pe-riods and the first week of training,the focus is on learning and develop-ing the basics of physical fitness.

Training emphasizes progressiveconditioning of the whole body. Tominimize the risk of injury, exercisesmust be done properly, and the inten-sity must progress at an appropriaterate. Special training should be consid-ered for soldiers who fail to maintainthe unit’s or group’s rate of progres-sion. Commanders should evaluateeach basic trainee who falls belowstandard and give him individualized,special assistance to improve his defi-ciencies.

More PT is not necessarily better.Chapter 11 describes how to developphysical training programs in IET units.

Advanced Individual Training (AIT)

Although AIT focuses on technicaland MOS-oriented subjects, physicalfitness must be emphasized throughout.Most soldiers arriving from basic train-ing are already well into the condition-ing phase. Therefore, AIT unit trainingshould focus on preparing soldiers tomeet the physical requirements of theirinitial duty assignments. (See TRA-DOC Reg. 350-6, Chapter 4.)

Walking, running, and climbingduring unit training contribute tophysical fitness, but they are not enough.Physical training in AIT requires con-tinued, regular, vigorous exercise whichstresses the whole body and addressesall the components of fitness.

By the end of AIT, soldiers mustmeet APFT standards. With good pro-grams and special training, all healthyAIT graduates should easily be able todemonstrate that they, possess the re-quired level of physical fitness.

By the end of AIT,

soldiers must meet

APFT standards.

1-10

Page 16: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

At least three groups of soldiers may

need special PT programs. They are as

follows:

• Those who fail the APFT and do not have medical profiles.

• Those who are overweight/overfat

according to AR 600-9

• Those who have either permanent or temporary medical profiles.

There must be a

p o s i t i v e a p p r o a c h t o

al l special f i tness

t r a i n i n g .

TOE and TDA Units–ActiveComponent

There are many types of units in theArmy, and their missions often requiredifferent levels of fitness. TOE andTDA units must emphasize attainingand maintaining the fitness level re-quired for the mission.

The unit’s standards may exceed theArmy’s minimums. By regulation(AR 350- 15), the unit’s standards canbe established by the unit’s commander,based on mission requirements.

TOE and TDA Units--ReserveComponents

The considerations for the activecomponent also apply to reserve com-ponents (RCS). However, since mem-bers of RC units cannot participatetogether in collective physical trainingon a regular basis, RC unit programsmust focus on the individual’s fitnessresponsibilities and efforts. Com-manders, however, must still ensurethat the unit’s fitness level and indi-vidual PT programs are maintained.MFTs can give valuable assistance toRC commanders and soldiers.

INDIVIDUAL PROGRAMS

Many soldiers are assigned to dutypositions that offer little opportunityto participate in collective unit PTprograms. Examples are HQDA,MACOM staffs, hospitals, service schoolstaff and faculty, recruiting, and ROTC.In such organizations, commanders mustdevelop leadership environments thatencourage and motivate soldiers toaccept individual responsibility for theirown physical fitness. Fitness require-ments are the same for these personnelas for others. Section chiefs and indi-vidual soldiers need to use the funda-mental principles and techniques out-lined in this manual to help them attainand maintain a high level of physical

fitness. MFTs can help developvidual fitness programs.

SPECIAL PROGRAMS

indi -

The day-to-day unit PT programconducted for most soldiers may notbe appropriate for all unit members.Some of them may not be able to ex-ercise at the intensity or duration bestsuited to their needs.

Leaders must also give special con-sideration to soldiers who are age 40 orolder and to recent arrivals who cannotmeet the standards of their new unit.

Special programs must be tailoredto each soldier’s needs, and trained,knowledgeable leaders should developand conduct them. This trainingshould be conducted with the unit, Ifthis is impossible, it should at leastoccur at the same time.

There must be a positive approachto all special fitness training. Soldierswho lack enough upper body strengthto do a given number of push-ups orenough stamina to pass the 2-mile runshould not be ridiculed. Instead, theirshortcomings should be assessed andthe information used to develop indi-vidualized programs to help themremedy their specific shortcomings. Acompany-sized unit may have as manyas 20 soldiers who need special atten-tion. Only smart planning will pro-duce good programs for all of them.

Commanders must counsel soldiers,explaining that special programs arebeing developed in their best interests.They must make it clear that standards

1-11

Page 17: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

will be enforced. Next, they shouldcoordinate closely with medical per-sonnel to develop programs that fit thecapabilities of soldiers with medicallimitations. Each soldier should thenbegin an individualized program basedon his needs.

MFTs know how to assess CR en-durance, muscular strength andendurance, flexibility, and bodycomposition. They can also developthorough, tailor-made programs forall of a unit’s special population.

APFT Failures

Although it is not the heart of theArmy’s physical fitness program, theAPFT is the primary instrument forevaluating the fitness level of eachsoldier. It is structured to assess themuscular endurance of specific musclegroups and the functional capacity ofthe CR system.

Soldiers with reasonable levels ofoverall physical fitness should easilypass the APFT. Those whose fitnesslevels are substandard will fail. Sol-diers who fail the APFT must receivespecial attention. Leaders should ana-lyze their weaknesses and design pro-grams to overcome them. For ex-ample, if the soldier is overweight,nutrition and dietary counseling maybe needed along with a special exerciseprogram. DA Pam 350-22 outlinesseveral ways to improve a soldier’sperformance on each of the APFTevents.

When trying to improve APFT per-formances, leaders must ensure thatsoldiers are not overloaded to the pointwhere the fitness training becomescounterproductive. They should useability groups for their running pro-gram and, in addition to a total-bodystrength-training program, should in-clude exercises designed for push-upand sit-up improvement. When deal-ing with special populations, two veryimportant principles are overload andrecovery. The quality, not just the

quantity, of the workout should beemphasized. Two-a-day sessions, un-less designed extremely well, can becounter-productive. More PT is notalways better.

Overweight Soldiers

Designers of weight loss and physi-cal training programs for overweightsoldiers should remember this: eventhough exercise is the key to sensibleweight loss, reducing the number ofcalories consumed is equally impor-tant. A combination of both actions isbest.

The type of exercise the soldier doesaffects the amount and nature of theweight loss. Both running and walkingburn about 100 calories per mile. Onepound of fat contains 3,500 calories.Thus, burning one pound of fat throughexercise alone requires a great deal ofrunning or walking. On the other hand,weight lost through dieting alone in-cludes the loss of useful muscle tissue.Those who participate in an exerciseprogram that emphasizes the develop-ment of strength and muscular endur-ance, however, can actually increasetheir muscle mass while losing bodyfat. These facts help explain whyexercise and good dietary practicesmust be combined.

Unit MFTs can help a soldier deter-mine the specific caloric requirementhe needs to safely and successfully loseexcess fat. They can devise a sound,individualized plan to arrive at thatreduced caloric intake. Likewise, unitMFTs can also develop training pro-grams which will lead to fat losswithout the loss of useful muscle tissue.

Generally, overweight soldiers shouldstrive to reduce their fat weight by twopounds per week. When a soldier losesweight, either by diet or exercise orboth, a large initial weight loss is notunusual. This may be due to water lossassociated with the using up of thebody’s carbohydrate stores. Althoughthese losses may be encouraging to the

1-12

Page 18: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

soldier, little of this initial weight lossis due to the loss of fat.

Soldiers should be weighed undersimilar circumstances and at the sametime each day. This helps avoid falsemeasurements due to normal fluctua-tions in their body weight during theday. As a soldier develops muscularendurance and strength, lean musclemass generally increases. Because muscleweighs more per unit of volume thanfat. caution is advised in assessing hisprogress. Just because a soldier is notlosing weight rapidly does not neces-sarily mean he is not losing fat. In fact,a good fitness program often results ingaining muscle mass while simultane-ously losing fat weight. If therereasonable doubt, his percentagebody fat should be determined.

Soldiers with Profiles

isof

This manual stresses what soldierscan do while on medical profile ratherthan what they cannot do.

DOD Directive 1308.1 requires that,“Those personnel identified with medi-cally limiting defects shall be placed ina physical fitness program consistentwith their limitations as advised bymedical authorities.”

AR 350-15 states, “For individualswith limiting profiles, commanderswill develop physical fitness programsin cooperation with health care per-sonnel.”

The Office of the Surgeon Generalhas developed DA Form 3349 to easethe exchange of information betweenhealth care personnel and the units. Onthis form, health care personnel list,along with limitations, those activitiesthat the profiled soldier can do tomaintain his fitness level. With thisinformation, the unit should directprofiled soldiers to participate in theactivities they can do. (An example ofDA Form 3349 is in Appendix B.)

All profiled soldiers should takepart in as much of the regular fitness

program as they can. Appropriate ac-tivities should be substituted to re-place those regular activities in whichthey cannot participate.

Chapter 2 describes some aerobicactivities the soldier can do to main-tain cardiorespiratory fitness when hecannot run. Chapter 3 shows how tostrengthen each body part. Applyingthis information should allow somestrength training to continue evenwhen body parts are injured. Thesame principle applies to flexibility(Chapter 4).

Medical treatment and rehabilita-tion should be aimed at restoring thesoldier to a suitable level of physicalfitness. Such treatment should useappropriate, progressive physical ac-tivities with medical or unit supervi-sion.

MFTs can help profiled soldiers byexplaining alternative exercises andhow to do them safely under thelimitations of their profile. MFTs arenot, however, trained to diagnose in-juries or prescribe rehabilitative exer-cise programs. This is the domain ofqualified medical personnel.

The activity levels of soldiers usu-ally decrease while they are recoveringfrom sickness or injury. As a result,they should pay special attention totheir diets to avoid gaining body fat.This guidance becomes more impor-tant as soldiers grow older. Withmedical supervision, proper diet, andthe right PT programs, soldiers shouldbe able to overcome their physicalprofiles and quickly return to theirnormal routines and fitness levels.

Age as a Factor in PhysicalFitness

All profiled soldiers should do as much of the regular fitness program as they can,along with subst i tute activities.

Soldiers who are age 40 and olderrepresent the Army’s senior leader-ship. On the battlefield, they mustlead other soldiers under conditions ofsevere stress. To meet this challenge

1-13

Page 19: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

and set a good example, these leadersmust maintain and demonstrate a highlevel of physical fitness. Since theirnormal duties may be stressful butnonphysical, they must take part regu-larly in a physical fitness program. Theneed to be physically fit does notdecrease with increased age.

People undergo many changes asthey grow older. For example, theamount of blood the heart can pumpper beat and per minute decreasesduring maximal exercise, as does themaximum heart rate. This lowers aperson’s physical ability, and per-formance suffers. Also, the percent ofbody weight composed of fat generallyincreases, while total muscle mass de-creases. The result is that muscularstrength and endurance, CR endur-ance, and body composition suffer. Adecrease in flexibility also occurs.

Men tend to maintain their peaklevels of muscular strength and endur-ance and CR fitness until age 30.After 30 there is a gradual declinethroughout their lives. Women tend toreach their peak in physical capabilityshortly after puberty and then undergoa progressive decline.

Although a decline in performancenormally occurs with aging, those whostay physically active do not have thesame rate of decline as those who donot. Decreases in muscular strengthand endurance, CR endurance, andflexibility occur to a lesser extent inthose who regularly train these fitnesscomponents.

Soldiers who are fit at age 40 andcontinue to exercise show a lesserdecrease in many of the physiologicalfunctions related to fitness than dothose who seldom exercise. A trained60-year-old, for example, may havethe same level of CR fitness as asedentary 20-year-old. In short, regu-lar exercise can help add life to youryears and years to your life.

The assessment phase of a programis especially important for those age 40and over. However, it is not necessaryor desirable to develop special fitnessprograms for these soldiers. Those whohave been exercising regularly maycontinue to exercise at the same level asthey did before reaching age 40. Aprogram based on the principles of ex-ercise and the training concepts in thismanual will result in a safe, long-termconditioning program for all soldiers.Only those age 40 and over who havenot been exercising regularly may needto start their exercise program at alower level and progress more slowlythan younger soldiers. Years of inac-tivity and possible abuse of the bodycannot be corrected in a few weeks ormonths.

As of 1 January 1989, soldiers reach-ing age 40 are no longer required to getclearance from a cardiovascular screen-ing program before taking the APFT.Only a medical profile will exemptthem from taking the biannual recordAPFT. They must, however, haveperiodic physical examinations in ac-cordance with AR 40-501 and NGR40-501. These include screening forcardiovascular risk factors.

Evaluation

To evaluate their physical fitnessand the effectiveness of their physicalfitness training programs, all militarypersonnel are tested biannually usingthe APFT in accordance with AR 350-15. (Refer to Chapter 14.) However,commanders may evaluate their physi-cal fitness programs more frequentlythan biannually.

SCORING CATEGORIES

There are two APFT categories oftesting for all military personnel Ini-tial Entry Training (IET) and the ArmyStandard.

1-14

Page 20: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

IET Standard

The APFT standard for basic train-ing is a minimum of 50 points perevent and no less than 150 pointsoverall by the end of basicGraduation requirements forOne Station Unit Trainingrequire 60 points per event.

Army Standard

training.AIT and(OSUT)

Safety is a major consideration when planning and evaluating physical training programs

Safety is a major consideration when planning and evaluat ing physi-cal t raining programs. Commanders must ensure that the programs do notplace their soldiers at undue risk of injury or accident . They should ad-dress the following items: •Env i ronmenta l cond i t ions (hea t / cold/traction). • Soldiers' levels of conditioning ( low/ high/age/sex). •Facilities (availability/instruction/ repair). •Traffic (routes/procedures/forma- tions). •Emergency procedures (medical/ c o m m u n i c a t i o n / t r a n s p o r t ) .

All other Army personnel (activeand reserve) who are non-IET soldiersmust attain the minimum Army stan-dard of at least 60 points per event. Toget credit for a record APFT, a medic-cally profiled soldier must, as a mini-mum, complete the 2-mile run or oneof the alternate aerobic events.

SAFETY

The objective of physical trainingin the Army is to enhance soldiers’abilities to meet the physical demandsof war. Any physical training whichresults in numerous injuries or acci-dents is detrimental to this goal. As inmost training, common sense mustprevail. Good, sound physical trainingshould challenge soldiers but shouldnot place them at undue risk nor leadto situations where accidents or inju-ries are likely to occur.

1-15

Page 21: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Cardiorespiratory (CR) fitness,sometimes called CR endurance, aero-bic fitness, or aerobic capacity, is oneof the five basic components of physi-cal fitness. CR fitness is a condition inwhich the body’s cardiovascular (cir-culatory) and respiratory systemsfunction together, especially duringexercise or work, to ensure that ade-quate oxygen is supplied to the work-ing muscles to produce energy. CRfitness is needed for prolonged, rhyth-mic use of the body’s large musclegroups. A high level of CR fitnesspermits continuous physical activitywithout a decline in performance andallows for rapid recovery followingfatiguing physical activity.

Activities such as running, roadmarching, bicycling, swimming, cross-country skiing, rowing, stair climbing,and jumping rope place an extra demandon the cardiovascular and respiratorysystems. During exercise, these sys-tems attempt to supply oxygen to theworking muscles. Most of this oxygenis used to produce energy for muscularcontraction. Any activity that con-tinuously uses large muscle groups for20 minutes or longer taxes these sys-tems. Because of this, a wide varietyof training methods is used to improvecardiorespiratory endurance.

To provide enough energy-producingoxygen to the muscles, the followingevents occur: • Greater movement of air through the lungs. • Increased movement of oxygen from the lungs into the blood stream.• Increased delivery of oxygen-laden blood to the working muscles by the heart's accelerated pumping action. • Regulation of the blood vessel's size to distribute blood away from inac- tive tissue to working muscle. • Greater movemen t of oxygen from the blood into the muscle tissue. • Accelerated return of veinous blood to the heart.

CR fitness is needed for

prolonged, rhythmic use

of the body's large

muscle groups.

Physiology of Aerobic Training

Aerobic exercise uses oxygen toproduce most of the body’s energyneeds. It also brings into play a fairlycomplex set of physiological events.

2-0

Page 22: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Aerobic exercise is the

best type of activity for

at taining and

m a i n t a i n i n g a l o w

percentage of body fat.

The best way to determine aerobiccapacity is to measure it in the labora-tory. It is much easier, however, to es-timate maximum oxygen uptake byusing other methods.

It is possible to determine a soldier’sCR fitness level and get an accurateestimate of his aerobic capacity by us-ing h i s APFT 2-mi le - run t ime .(Appendix F explains how to do this.)Other tests - the bicycle, walk, and steptests - may also be used to estimateone’s aerobic capacity and evaluateone’s CR fitness level.

In the presence of oxygen, musclecells produce energy by breaking downcarbohydrates and fats. In fact, fatsare only used as an energy source whenoxygen is present. Hence, aerobicexercise is the best type of activity forattaining and maintaining a low per-centage of body fat.

A person’s maximum aerobic capac-ity can be modified through physicaltraining. To reach very high levels ofaerobic fitness, one must train hard.The best way to improve CR fitness isto participate regularly in a demandingaerobic exercise program.

Many factors can negateively affectone's ability to perform well aerobi-cally. These include the following:• A g e . • A n e m i a . • Carbon monoxide from tobacco smoke or pollution. • High altitude (reduced oxygen pres- sure). • Illness (heart disease). • Obesity. • Sedentary life-style.

Any condition that reduces the body’sability to bring in, transport, or useoxygen reduces a person’s ability toperform aerobically. Inactivity causesmuch of the decrease in physical fit-ness that occurs with increasing age.Some of this decrease in aerobic fitness

can be slowed by taking part in aregular exercise program.

Certain medical conditions alsoimpair the transport of oxygen. Theyinclude diseases of the lungs, whichinterfere with breathing, and dis-abling heart conditions. Another issevere blocking of the arteries whichinhibits blood flow to the heart andskeletal muscles.

Smoking can lead to any or all of theabove problems and can, in the longand short term, adversely affect one’sability to do aerobic exercise.

FITT Factors

As mentioned in Chapter 1, a personmust integrate several factors into anysuccessful fitness training program toimprove his fitness level. These fac-tors are summarized by the followingwords which form the acronym FITT.Frequency, Intensity, Time, and Type.They are described below as theypertain to cardiorespiratory fitness. Awarm-up and cool-down should alsobe part of each workout. Informationon warming up and cooling down isgiven in Chapters 1 and 4.

FREQUENCY

Frequency refers to how often oneexercises. It is related to the intensityand duration of the exercise session.Conditioning the CR system can bestbe accomplished by three adequatelyintense workouts per week. Soldiersshould do these on alternate days. Bybuilding up gradually, soldiers can geteven greater benefits from workingout five times a week. However,leaders should recognize the need forrecovery between hard exercise peri-ods and should adjust the training in-tensity accordingly. They must also beaware of the danger of overtrainingand recognize that the risk of injuryincreases as the intensity and durationof training increases.

2-1

Page 23: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

INTENSITY

Intensity is related to how hard oneexercises. It represents the degree ofeffort with which one trains and isprobably the single most importantfactor for improving performance. Un-fortunately, it is the factor many unitsignore.

Changes in CR fitness are directlyrelated to how hard an aerobic exerciseis performed. The more energy ex-pended per unit of time, the greaterthe intensity of the exercise. Signifi-cant changes in CR fitness are broughtabout by sustaining training heartrates in the range of 60 to 90 percentof the heart rate reserve (HRR). In-tensities of less than 60 percent HRRare generally inadequate to produce atraining effect, and those that exceed90 percent HRR can be dangerous.

Soldiers should gauge the intensityof their workouts for CR fitness bydetermining and exercising at theirtraining heart rate (THR). Using theTHR method lets them find and pre-scribe the correct level of intensityduring CR exercise. By determiningone’s maximum heart rate, restingheart rate, and relative conditioninglevel, an appropriate THR or intensitycan be prescribed.

One’s ability to monitor the heartrate is the key to success in CRtraining. (Note: Ability-group run-ning is better than unit running be-cause unit running does not accommo-date the individual soldier’s THR. Forexample, some soldiers in a formationmay be training at 50 percent HRRand others at 95 percent HRR. As aresult, the unit run will be too intensefor some and not intense enough forothers.)

The heart rate during work or exer-cise is an excellent indicator of howmuch effort a person is exerting.Keeping track of the heart rate lets onegauge the intensity of the CR exercisebeing done. With this information,

one can be sure that the intensity isenough to improve his CR fitness level.

Percent MHR Method

With this method, the THR is fig-ured using the estimated maximal heartrate. A soldier determines his esti-mated maximum heart rate by sub-tracting his age from 220. Thus, a 20-year-old would have an estimatedmaximum heart rate (MHR) of 200beats per minute (220 -20 = 200).

When using the MHR method, onemust compensate for its built-in weak-ness. A person using this method mayexercise at an intensity which is nothigh enough to cause a training effect.To compensate for this, a person whois in poor shape should exercise at 70percent of his MHR; if he is inrelatively good shape, at 80 percentMHR; and, if he is in excellent shape,at 90 percent MHR.

2-2

Page 24: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Percent HRR Method

A more accurate way to calculateTHR is the percent HRR method. Therange from 60 to 90 percent HRR is theTHR range in which people shouldexercise to improve their CR fitnesslevels. If a soldier knows his generallevel of CR fitness, he can determinewhich percentage of HRR is a goodstarting point for him. For example, ifhe is in excellent physical condition, hecould start at 85 percent of his HRR; ifhe is in reasonably good shape, at 70percent HRR; and, if he is in poorshape, at 60 percent HRR.

Most CR workouts should be con-ducted with the heart rate between 70to 75 percent HRR to attain, or main-tain, an adequate level of fitness. Soldierswho have reached a high level offitness may derive more benefit fromworking at a higher percentage ofHRR, particularly if they cannot findmore than 20 minutes for CR exercise.Exercising at any lower percentage ofHRR does not give the heart, muscles,and lungs an adequate training stimu-lus.

Before anyone begins aerobic train-ing, he should know his THR (the heartrate at which he needs to exercise to geta training effect).

2-3

Page 25: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

As shown, the percentage (70 per-cent in this example) is converted tothe decimal form (0.70) before it ismultiplied by the HRR. The result isthen added to the resting heart rate(RHR) to get the THR. Thus, theproduct obtained by multiplying 0.70and 131 is 91.7. When 91.7 is added tothe RHR of 69, a THR of 160.7 results.When the calculations produce a frac-tion of a heart beat, as in the example,the value is rounded off to the nearestwhole number. In this case, 160.7BPM is rounded off to give a THR of161 BPM. In summary, a reasonablyfit 20-year-old soldier with a restingheart rate of 69 BPM has a trainingheart rate goal of 161 BPM. To de-termine the RHR, or to see if one iswithin the THR during and right afterexercise, place the tip of the thirdfinger lightly over one of the carotidarteries in the neck. These arteries arelocated to the left and right of theAdam’s apple. (See Figure 2-1A.)Another convenient spot from whichto monitor the pulse is on the radialartery on the wrist just above the baseof the thumb. (See Figure 2-lB.) Yetanother way is to place the hand overthe heart and count the number ofheart beats. (See Figure 2-1 C.)

I

During aerobic exercise, the body

will usually have reached a "Steady

State" after five minutes of exercise,

and the heart rate will have leveled off.

At this time, and immediately after ex-

ercising, the soldier should monitor his

heart rate.

He should count his pulse for 10seconds, then multiply this by six to gethis heart rate for one minute. This willlet him determine if his training inten-sity is high enough to improve his CRfitness level.

For example, use the THR of 161BPM figured above. During the 10-second period, the soldier should get acount of 27 beats (161/6= 26.83 or 27)if he is exercising at the right intensity.If his pulse rate is below the THR, hemust exercise harder to increase hispulse to the THR. If his pulse is abovethe THR, he should normally exerciseat a lower intensity to reduce the pulserate to the prescribed THR. He shouldcount as accurately as possible, sinceone missed beat during the 10-secondcount, multiplied by six, gives an errorof six BPM.

Figure 2-1

2-4

Page 26: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

A soldier who maintains his THR exercise. have a THR of 23 beats in 10

A soldier who maintainsthroughout a 20- to 30-minute exercise seconds. He can determine this from

his THR throughout aperiod is doing well and can expect im- the table by locating his age and then

20-30-minute exerciseprovement in his CR fitness level. He tracking upward until he reaches theshould check his exercise and post-

period is doing well andpercent HRR for his fitness level.

exercise pulse rate at least once each Again, those with a low fitness levelcan expect improvement workout. If he takes only one pulsein his CR fitness level.

should work at about 60 percent HRRcheck, he should do it five minutes into and those with a good fitness level atthe workout.

Figure 2-2 is a chart that makes iteasy to determine what a soldier’s THRshould be during a 10-second count.Using this figure, a soldier can easilyfind his own THR just by knowing hisage and general fitness level. Forexample, a 40-year-old soldier with alow fitness level should, during aerobic

70 percent HRR. Those with a highlevel of fitness may benefit most bytraining at 80 to 90 percent HRR.

Another way to gauge exercise in-tensity is “perceived exertion.” Thismethod relies on how difficult theexercise seems to be and is describedin Appendix G.

Figure 2-2

2-5

Page 27: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

TIME

Time, or duration, refers to howlong one exercises. It is inverselyrelated to intensity. The more intensethe activity, the shorter the time neededto produce or maintain a trainingeffect; the less intense the activity, thelonger the required duration. Toimprove CR fitness, the soldier musttrain for at least 20 to 30 minutes at hisTHR.

TYPE

Only aerobic exercises that requirebreathing in large volumes of airimprove CR fitness. Worthwhile aero-bic activities must involve the use oflarge muscle groups and must be rhyth-mic. They must also be of sufficientduration and intensity (60 to 90 per-cent HRR). Examples of primary andsecondary exercises for improving CRfitness are as follows:

P R I M A R Y • Running. • Rowing. • Jogging. • Skiing (cross-country). • Walking (vigorous). • Exercising to music. • Road marching. • Rope skipping. • Bicycling (stationary). •Swimming. • Bicycling (road/street). • Stair climbing.

SECONDARY (Done with partners oropponents of equal or greater ability.)•Racquetball (singles). •Basketball (full court). •Handball (singles). •Tennis (singles).

Important information

on safety factors and

common running

injuries is presented in

C hapter 13 and

Appendix E .

The primary exercises are more ef-fective than the secondary exercises inproducing positive changes in CR fit-ness.

The secondary activities may brieflyelevate the heart rate but may not keepit elevated to the THR throughout theentire workout.

Every activity has its advantages and Every activity has itsdisadvantages. Trainers must weigh advantages andthese and design programs that fit the disadvantages. Trainersunit’s needs. must design programs

that fit the unit’s needs.

Running

Running enables the body to im-prove the transport of blood and oxy-gen to the working muscles and bringsabout positive changes in the muscles’ability to produce energy. Runningfits well into any physical training pro-gram ‘because a training effect can beattained with only three 20-minuteworkouts per week.

Some soldiers may need instructionto improve their running ability. Thefollowing style of running is desired.The head is erect with the body in astraight line or slightly bent forward atthe waist. The elbows are bent so theforearms are relaxed and held looselyat waist level. The arms swing natu-rally from front to rear in straightlines. (Cross-body arm movementswaste energy. The faster the run, thefaster the arm action.) The toes pointstraight ahead, and the feet strike onthe heel and push off at the big toe.

Besides learning running techniques,soldiers need information on ways toprevent running injuries. The mostcommon injuries associated with PT inthe Army result from running andoccur to the feet, ankles, knees, andlegs. Proper warm-up and cool-down,along with stretching exercises andwearing appropriate clothing and well-fitting running shoes, help preventinjuries. Important information onsafety factors and common running in-juries is presented in Chapter 13 andAppendix E.

Failure to allow recovery betweenhard bouts of running cannot only leadto overtraining, but can also be a major

2-6

Page 28: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

cause of injuries. A well-conditionedsoldier can run five to six times a week.However, to do this safely, he shoulddo two things: 1) gradually buildup torunning that frequently; and, 2) varythe intensity and/or duration of therunning sessions to allow recoverybetween them.

ABILITY GROUP RUNNING

Traditionally, soldiers have run inunit formations at a pace prescribed bythe PT leader. Commanders have usedunit runs to improve unit cohesion andfitness levels. Unfortunately, too manysoldiers are not challenged enough bythe intensity or duration of the unitrun, and they do not receive a trainingbenefit. For example, take a companythat runs at a nine-minute-per-milepace for two miles. Only soldiers whocannot run two miles in a time fasterthan 18 minutes will receive a signifi-cant training effect. Therefore, interms of conditioning, most soldierswho can pass the 2-mile-run test arewasting their time and losing the chanceto train hard to excel. Ability grouprunning (AGR) is the best way toprovide enough intensity so each sol-dier can improve his own level of CRfitness.

AGR lets soldiers train in groups ofnear-equal ability. Each group runs ata pace intense enough to produce atraining effect for that group and eachsoldier in it. Leaders should programthese runs for specific lengths of time,not miles to be run. This procedure letsmore-fit groups run a greater distancethan the less-fit groups in the sametime period thus enabling every soldierto improve.

The best way to assign soldiers toability groups is to make a list, in

The best way to assign order, of the unit’s most recent APFTsoldiers to ability 2-mile-run times. The number of

groups is to, make a list, groups depends on the unit size, num-in order, of the unit’s ber of leaders available to conduct the

most recent APFT runs, and range of 2-mile-run times.2-mile-run times. A company-sized unit broken down

into four to six ability groups, eachwith a leader, is best for aerobictraining, For activities like circuits,strength training, and competitiveevents, smaller groups are easier towork with than one large group.

Because people progress at differentrates, soldiers should move to fastergroups when they are ready. To helpthem train at their THR and enhancetheir confidence, those who have ahard time keeping up with a groupshould be placed in a slower group. Asthe unit’s fitness level progresses, soshould the intensity at which eachgroup exercises. Good leadership willprevent a constant shifting of soldiersbetween groups due to lack of effort.

AGR is best conducted at the rightintensity at least three times a week.As explained, the CR system shouldnot be exercised “hard” on consecutivedays. If AGR is used on hard CR-training days, unit runs at lower inten-sities are good for recovery days.Using this rotation, soldiers can gainthe desired benefits of both unit andability-group runs. The problem comeswhen units have a limited number ofdays for PT and there is not enoughtime for both. In this case, unit runsshould seldom, if ever, be used andshould be recognized for what theyare -- runs to build unit cohesion.

Leaders can use additional methodsto achieve both goals. The unit canbegin in formation and divide intoability groups at a predetermined re-lease point. The run can also beginwith soldiers divided into ability groupswhich join at a link-up point. Alter-nately, ability groups can be startedover the same route in a stagger, withthe slowest group first. Link-upsoccur as each faster group overtakesslower groups.

With imagination and planning, AGRwill result in more effective trainingworkouts for each soldier. The argu-ment that ability-group running de-tracts from unit cohesion is invalid.Good leadership and training in all

2-7

Page 29: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

areas promote unit cohesion and teamspirit; training that emphasizes formover substance does not.

INTERVAL TRAINING

Interval training also works the car-diorespiratory system. It is an ad-vanced form of exercise training whichhelps a person significantly improvehis fitness level in a relatively shorttime and increase his running speed.

In interval training, a soldier exer-cises by running at a pace that isslightly faster than his race pace forshort periods of time. This may befaster than the pace he wants to main-tain during the next APFT 2-mile run.He does this repeatedly with periods ofrecovery placed between periods offast running. In this way, the energysystems used are allowed to recover,and the exerciser can do more fast-paced running in a given workout thanif he ran continuously without resting.This type of intermittent training canalso be used with activities such ascycling, swimming, bicycling, rowing,and road marching.

The following example illustrateshow the proper work-interval timesand recovery times can be calculatedfor interval training so that it can beused to improve a soldier’s 2-mile-runperformance.

The work-interval time (the speedat which a soldier should run each440-yard lap) depends on his actualrace pace for one mile. If a soldier’sactual 1-mile-race time is not known,it can be estimated from his last APFTby taking one half of his 2-mile-runtime. Using a 2-mile-run time of1600 minutes as an example, the pacefor an interval training workout is cal-culated as follows:

Step 1. Determine (or estimate) the actual 1-mile-race pace. The soldier's 2-mile-run time is 16:00 minutes, and his estimated pace for 1 mile is one half of this or 8:00 minutes. Step 2. Using the time from Step 1, determine the time it took to run 440 yards by dividing the 1-mile-race pace by four. (8:00 minutes/4 = 2:00 min- utes per 440 yards.) Step 3. Subtract one to four seconds from the 440-yard time in Step 2 to find the time each 440-yard lap should be run during an interval training session. (2:00 minutes - 1 to 4 seconds = 1:59 to 1:56.) Thus, each 440-yard lap should be run in 1 munute, 56 seconds to 1minute, 59 seconds during intervaltraining based on the soldier's 16:00, 2-mile run time. Recovery periods, twice the length of the work-interval periods. These recovery peri- ods, therefore, will be 3 minutes, 52 seconds long (1:56 + 1:56 = 3:52).

Using the work-interval time foreach 440-yard lap from Step 3, thesoldier can run six to eight repetitionsof 440 yards at a pace of 1 minute, 56seconds (1:56) for each 440-yard run.This can be done on a 440-yard track(about 400 meters) as follows:

1. Run six to eight 440-yard repeti- tions with each interval run at a 1:56 pace. 2. Follow each 440-yard run done in 1 minute, 56 secons by an easy jog of 440 yards for recovery. Each 440-yardjog should take twice as much time asthe work interval (that is, 3:52). Foreach second of work, there are twoseconds of recovery. Thus, the work- to-rest ratio is 1:2.

2-8

Page 30: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Table 2-1

To help determine the correct timeintervals for a wide range of fitnesslevels, refer to Table 2-1. It showscommon 1 -mile times and the corre-sponding 440-yard times.

Monitoring the heart-rate responseduring interval training is not as im-portant as making sure that the workintervals are run at the proper speed.Because of the intense nature of inter-val training, during the work intervalthe heart rate will generally climb to 85or 90 percent of HRR. During therecovery interval, the heart rate usu-ally falls to around 120 to 140 beats perminute. Because the heart rate is notthe major concern during interval train-ing, monitoring THR and using it as atraining guide is not necessary.

As the soldier becomes more condi-tioned, his recovery is quicker. As aresult, he should either shorten the re-covery interval (jogging time) or runthe work interval a few seconds faster.

After a soldier has reached a goodCR fitness level using the THR method,he should be ready for interval train-ing. As with any other new trainingmethod, interval training should beintroduced into his training programgradually and progressively. At first,he should do it once a week. If heresponds well, he may do it twice a

week at the most, with at least onerecovery day in between. He may alsodo recovery workouts of easy joggingon off days. It is recommended thatinterval training be done two times aweek only during the last severalweeks before an APFT. Also, he shouldrest the few days before the test bydoing no, or very easy, running.

As with any workout, soldiers shouldstart intervaI workouts with a warm-up and end them with a cool-down.

FARTLEK TRAINING

In Fartlek training, another type ofCR training sometimes called speedplay, the soldier varies the intensity(speed) of the running during theworkout. Instead of running at a con-stant speed, he starts with veryslowjogging. When ready, he runs hard fora few minutes until he feels the needto slow down. At this time he recoversby jogging at an easy pace. This processof alternating fast and recovery run-ning (both of varying distances) givesthe same results as interval training.However, neither the running nor re-covery interval is timed, and the run-ning is not done on a track. For thesereasons, many runners prefer Fartlektraining to interval training.

In Fartlek training, the

s o l d i e r v a r i e s t h e

intensity (speed) of the

running throughout the

w o r k o u t .

2-9

Page 31: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

LAST-MAN-UP RUNNING

This type of running, which in-cludes both sprinting and paced run-ning, improves CR endurance andconditions the legs. It consists of 40-to 50-yard sprints at near-maximumeffort. This type of running is bestdone by squads and sections. Eachsquad leader places the squad in anevenly-spaced, single-file line on atrack or a smooth, flat course. Duringa continuous 2- to 3-mile run ofmoderate intensity, the squad leader,running in the last position, sprints tothe front of the line and becomes theleader. When he reaches the front, heresumes the moderate pace of thewhole squad. After he reaches thefront, the next soldier, who is now atthe rear, immediately sprints to thefront. The rest of the soldiers continueto run at a moderate pace. This patternof sprinting by the last person contin-ues until each soldier has resumed hisoriginal position in line. This patternof sprinting and running is repeatedseveral times during the run. The dis-tance run and number of sprints per-formed should increase as the soldiers’conditioning improves.

CROSS-COUNTRY RUNNING

Cross-country running conditionsthe leg muscles and develops CR en-durance. It consists of running acertain distance on a course laid outacross fields, over hills, through woods,or on any other irregular terrain. Itcan be used as both a physical condi-tioning activity and a competitiveevent. The object is to cover thedistance in the shortest time.

The unit is divided into abilitygroups using 2-mile-run times. Eachgroup starts its run at the same time.This lets the better-conditioned groupsrun farther and helps ensure that theyreceive an adequate training stimulus.

The speed and distance can beincreased gradually as the soldiers’

conditioning improves. At first, thedistance should be one mile or less,depending on the terrain and fitnesslevel. It should then be gradually in-creased to four miles. Cross-countryruns have several advantages: theyprovide variety in physical fitness train-ing, and they can accommodate largenumbers of soldiers. Interest can bestimulated by competitive runs aftersoldiers attain a reasonable level offitness. These runs may also be com-bined with other activities such ascompass work (orienteering).

Cross-country runs can

accommodate large

numbers of soldiers.

Road Marches

The road or foot march is one of thebest ways to improve and maintainfitness. Road marches are classified aseither administrative or tactical, andthey can be conducted in garrison or inthe field. Soldiers must be able to movequickly, carry a load (rucksack) ofequipment, and be physically able toperform their missions after extendedmarching.

BENEFITS OF ROAD MARCHES

Road marches are an excellent aero-bic activity. They also help developendurance in the muscles of the lowerbody when soldiers carry a heavy load.Road marches offer several benefits Road marches helpwhen used as part of a fitness program.They are easy to organize, and large

troops acclimatize to

numbers of soldiers can participate. In new environments,

addition, when done in an intelligent,systematic, and progressive manner,they produce relatively few injuries.Many soldier-related skills can beintegrated into road marches. They canalso help troops acclimatize to newenvironments. They help train leadersto develop skills in planning, prepara-tion, and supervision and let leadersmake first-hand observations of thesoldiers’ physical stamina. Becauseroad marches are excellent fitness-training activities, commanders shouldmake them a regular part of their unit’sPT program.

2-10

Page 32: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

TYPES OF MARCHES

The four types of road marches -day, limited visibility, forced, andshuttle - are described below. Formore information on marches, seeFM 21-18.

Day Marches

Day marches, which fit easily intothe daily training plan, are most con-ducive to developing physical fitness.They are characterized by dispersedformations and ease of control and re-connaissance.

Any plan to conduct a road march toimprove physical fitness should con-sider the following: •Load to be carried. •Discipline and supervision. •Distance to be marched. •Route reconnaissance. •Time al lot ted for movement. •Water stops. •Present level of fitness. •Rest stops. •Intensity of the march. •Provisions for injuries. •Terrain an weather conditions. •Safety precautions.

Limited Visibility Marches

Limited visibility marches requiremore detailed planning and supervi-sion and are harder to control than daymarches. Because they move moreslowly and are in tighter formations,soldiers may not exercise hard enoughto obtain a conditioning effect. Lim-ited visibility marches do have someadvantages, however. They protectsoldiers from the heat of the day,challenge the ability of NCOS and of-ficers to control their soldiers, andprovide secrecy and surprise in tacticalsituations.

Forced Marches

Soldiers should receive

advance notcie before

going on a march, to

help morale and give

them time to prepare.

Forced marches require more thanthe normal effort in speed and exer-tion. Although they are excellent con-ditioners, they may leave soldiers toofatigued to do other required trainingtasks.

Shuttle Marches

Shuttle marches alternate riding andmarching, usually because there arenot enough vehicles to carry the entireunit. These marches may be modifiedand used as fitness activities. A shuttlemarch can be planned to move troopsof various fitness levels from one pointto another, with all soldiers arriving at

about the same time. Soldiers whohave high fitness levels can generallymarch for longer stretches than thosewho are less fit.

PLANNING A ROAD MARCH

Soldiers should usually receive ad-vance notice before going on a march.This helps morale and gives them timeto prepare. The leader should choosean experienced soldier as a pacesetterto lead the march. The pacesettershould carry the same load as the othersoldiers and should be of mediumheight to ensure normal strides. Thenormal stride for a foot march, ac-cording to FM 21-18, is 30 inches.This stride, and a cadence of 106 stepsper minute, results in a speed of 4.8kilometers per hour (kph). When a 10-minute rest is taken each hour, a netspeed of 4 kph results.

The pacesetter should keep in mindthat ground slope and footing affectstride length. For example, the lengthdecreases when soldiers march up hillsor down steep slopes. Normal strideand cadence are maintained easily onmoderate, gently rolling terrain unlessthe footing is muddy, slippery, orrough.

Personal hygiene is important inpreventing unnecessary injuries. Be-fore the march, soldiers should cuttheir toenails short and square them

2-11

Page 33: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

off, wash and dry their feet, andlightly apply foot powder. They shouldwear clean, dry socks that fit well andhave no holes. Each soldier shouldtake one or more extra pair of socksdepending on the length of the march.Soldiers who have had problems withblisters should apply a thin coating ofpetroleum jelly over susceptible areas.Leaders should check soldiers’ bootsbefore the march to make sure thatthey fit well, are broken in and in goodrepair, with heels that are even and notworn down.

During halts soldiers should lie downand elevate their feet. If time permits,they should massage their feet, applypowder, and change socks. Stretchingfor a few minutes before resuming themarch may relieve cramps and sore-ness and help prepare the muscles tocontinue exercising. To help preventlower back strain, soldiers should helpeach other reposition the rucksacksand other loads following rest stops.Soldiers can relieve swollen feet byslightly loosening the laces across theirarches.

After marches, soldiers should againcare for their feet, wash and drysocks, and dry their boots.

PROGRAMS TO IMPROVELOAD-CARRYING ABILITY

their

The four generalized programs de-scribed below can be used to improvethe soldiers’ load-carrying ability. Eachprogram is based on a different num-ber of days per week available for a PTprogram.

If only two days are available for PT,both should include exercises forimproving CR fitness and muscularendurance and strength. Roughly equalemphasis should be given to each ofthese fitness components.

If there are only three days availablefor PT, they should be evenly dis-persed throughout the week. Two ofthe days should stress the developmentof muscular endurance and strengthfor the whole body. Although all of themajor muscle groups of the body shouldbe trained, emphasis should be placed

2-12

Page 34: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

on the leg (hamstrings and quadriceps),hip (gluteal and hip flexors), low back(spinal erector), and abdominal (rectusabdominis) muscles. These two daysshould also include brief (2-mile) CRworkouts of light to moderate intensity(65 to 75 percent HRR). On the oneCR fitness day left, soldiers shouldtake a long distance run (4 to 6 miles)at a moderate pace (70 percent HRR),an interval workout, or an aerobiccircuit. They should also do somestrength work of light volume andintensity. If four days are available, aroad march should be added to thethree-day program at least twicemonthly. The speed, load, distance,and type of terrain should be varied.

If there are five days, leaders shoulddevote two of them to muscular strengthand endurance and two of them to CRfitness. One CR fitness day will uselong distance runs; the other can stressmore intense workouts including in-terval work, Fartlek running, or last-man-up running. At least two timesper month, the remaining day shouldinclude a road march.

Soldiers can usually begin road-march training by carrying a total loadequal to 20 percent of their bodyweight. This includes all clothing andequipment. However, the gender make-up and/or physical condition of a unitmay require using a different startingload. Beginning distances should bebetween five and six miles, and thepace should be at 20 minutes per mileover flat terrain with a hard surface.Gradual increases should be made inspeed, load, and distance until soldierscan do the anticipated, worst-case,mission-related scenarios without ex-cessive difficulty or exhaustion. Unitsshould take maintenance marches atleast twice a month. Distances shouldvary from six to eight miles, with loadsof 30 to 40 percent of body weight.The pace should be 15 to 20 minutesper mile.

A recent Army study showed thatroad-march training two times a monthand four times a month producedsimilar improvements in road-march-ing performance. Thus, twice-monthlyroad marches appear to produce afavorable improvement in soldiers’abilities to road march if they aresupported by a sound PT program(five days per week)

Commanders must establish realis-tic goals for road marching based onassigned missions. They should alsoallow newly assigned soldiers and thosecoming off extended profiles to gradu-ally build up to the unit’s fitness levelbefore making them carry maximumloads. This can be done with abilitygroups.

Road marching should be integratedinto all other training. Perhaps the bestsingle way to improve Ioad-earringcapacity is to have a regular trainingprogram which systematically increasesthe load and distance. It must also letthe soldier regularly practice carryingheavy loads over long distances.

As much as possible, leaders at alllevels must train and march with theirunits. This participation enhancesleaders’ fitness levels and improvesteam spirit and confidence, both vitalelements in accomplishing difficultand demanding road marches.

Alternate Forms ofAerobic Exercise

Some soldiers cannot run. In suchcases, they may use other activities assupplements or alternatives. Swim-ming, bicycling, and cross-countryskiing are all excellent endurance ex-ercises and are good substitutes forrunning. Their drawback is that theyrequire special equipment and facili-ties that are not always available. Aswith all exercise, soldiers should startslowly and progress gradually. Thosewho use non-running activities to

Leaders must train and march with their units as much as possible.

Units should do maintenance marches at least twice a month.

2-13

Page 35: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

such training may not improve run-ning ability. To prepare a soldier forthe APFT 2-mile run, there is no sub-stitute for running.

SWIMMING

Swimming is a good alternative torunning. Some advantages of swim-ming include the following:o Involvement of all the major muscle

groups.o Body position that enhances the

blood’s return to the heart.o Partial support of body weight by

the water, which minimizes lowerbody stress in overweight soldiers.Swimming may be used to improve

one’s CR fitness level and to maintainand improve CR fitness during recov-ery from an injury. It is used tosupplement running and develop upperbody endurance and limited strength.The swimmer should start slowly witha restful stroke. After five minutes, heshould stop to check his pulse, com-pare it with his THR and, if needed,adjust the intensity.

Compared with all the other modesof aerobic exercise presented in thismanual (e.g., running, walking, cy-cling, cross-country skiing, ropejumping, etc.) in swimming alone,one’s THR should be lower than whiledoing the other forms of aerobic exer-cise. This is because, in swimming, theheart does not beat as fast as whendoing the other types of exercise at thesame work rate. Thus, in order toeffectively train the CR system duringswimming, a soldier should set hisTHR about 10 bpm lower than whilerunning. For example, a soldier whoseTHR while running is 150 bpm shouldhave a THR of about 140 bpm whileswimming. By modifying their THRsin this manner while swimming, sol-diers will help to ensure that they areworking at the proper intensity.

Non-swimmers can run in waist-tochest-deep water, tread water, and dopool-side kicking for an excellent

aerobic workout. They can also docalisthenics in the water. Togetherthese activities combine walking andrunning with moderate resistance workfor the upper body.

For injured soldiers, swimming andaerobic water-training are excellentfor improving CR fitness without plac-ing undue stress on injured weight-bearing parts of the body.

CYCLING

Cycling is an excellent exercise fordeveloping CR fitness. Soldiers canbicycle outdoors or on a stationarycycling machine indoors. Road cyclingshould be intense enough to allow thesoldier to reach and maintain THR atleast 30 minutes.

Soldiers can alter the cycling inten-sity by changing gears, adding hill Cycling should bework, and increasing velocity. Dis- intense enough to let thetance can also be increased to enhance soldier reach andCR fitness, but the distance covered is maintain THR at leastnot as important as the amount of time 30 minutes.spent training at THR. The intensityof a workout can be increased by in-creasing the resistance against the wheelor increasing the pedaling cadence(number of RPM), For interval train-ing, the soldier can vary the speed andresistance and use periods of active For swimming, a soldierrecovery at low speed and/or low should set his THR atresistance. about 10 beats per

minute lower then whenWALKING running.

Walking is another way to developcardiorespiratory fitness. It is enjoy-able, requires no equipment, and causesfew injuries. However, unless walkingis done for a long time at the correctintensity, it will not produce any sig-nificant CR conditioning.

Sedentary soldiers with a low degreeof fitness should begin slowly with 12minutes of walking at a comfortablepace. The heart rate should be moni-tored to determine the intensity. Thesoldier should walk at least four timesa week and add two minutes each week

2-14

Page 36: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

to every workout until the durationreaches 45 to 60 minutes per workout.He can increase the intensity by addinghills or stairs.

As the walker’s fitness increases, heshould walk 45 to 60 minutes at a fasterpace. A simple way to increase walk-ing speed is to carry the arms the sameway as in running. With this techniquethe soldier has a shorter arm swing andtakes steps at a faster rate. Swingingthe arms faster to increase the pace isa modified form of race walking (powerwalking) which allows for more upper-body work. This method may also beused during speed marches. Afterabout three months, even the mostunfit soldiers should reach a level ofconditioning that lets them move intoa running program.

CROSS-COUNTRY SKIING

Cross-country or Nordic skiing isanother excellent alternative to theusual CR activities. It requires vigor-ous movement of the arms and legs

Cross-country skiing which develops muscular and CRrequires vigorous endurance and coordination. Some of

movement of the arms the highest levels of aerobic fitnessand legs, developing ever measured have been found inmuscular and CR cross-country skiers.

endurance. Although some regions lack snow,one form or another of cross-countryskiing can be done almost anywhere--on country roads, golf courses, openfields, and in parks and forests.

Cross-country skiing is easy to learn.The action is similar to that used inbrisk walking, and the intensity may bevaried as in running. The work load isdetermined by the difficulty of ter-rain, the pace, and the frequency andduration of rest periods. Equipment isreasonably priced, with skis, boots,and poles often obtainable from theoutdoor recreation services.

ROPE SKIPPING

Rope skipping is also a good exer-cise for developing CR fitness. Itrequires little equipment, is easilylearned, may be done almost any-where, and is not affected by weather.Some runners use it as a substitute forrunning during bad weather.

A beginner should select a jumprope that, when doubled and stood on,reaches to the armpits. Weightedhandles or ropes may be used bybetter-conditioned soldiers to improveupper body strength. Rope skippersshould begin with five minutes ofjumping rope and then monitor theirheart rate. They should attain andmaintain their THR to ensure a train-ing effect, and the time spent jumpingshould be increased as the fitness levelimproves.

Rope jumping, however, may bestressful to the lower extremities andtherefore should be limited to no morethan three times a week. Soldiersshould skip rope on a cushioned sur-face such as a mat or carpet and shouldwear cushioned shoes.

HANDBALL ANDRACQUET SPORTS

Handball and the racquet sports(tennis, squash, and racquetball) in-volve bursts of intense activity forshort periods. They do not provide thesame degree of aerobic training asexercises of longer duration done atlower intensities. However, thesesports are good supplements and canprovide excellent aerobic benefitsdepending on the skill of the players.If played vigorously each day, theymay be an adequate substitute for low-level aerobic training. Because run-ning increases endurance, it helps

2-15

Page 37: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

improve performance in racket sports,but the reverse is not necessarily true.

EXERCISE TO MUSIC

Aerobic exercise done to music isanother excellent alternative to run-ning. It is a motivating, challengingactivity that combines exercise andrhythmic movements. There is noprerequisite skill, and it can be totallyindividualized to every fitness level byvarying the frequency, intensity, andduration. One can move to varioustempos while jogging or doing

jumping jacks, hops, jumps, or manyother calisthenics.

Workouts can be done in a smallspace by diverse groups of varyingfitness levels. Heart rates should betaken during the conditioning phase tobe sure the workout is sufficientlyintense. If strengthening exercises areincluded, the workout addresses everycomponent of fitness. Holding rela-tively light dumbbells during the work-out is one way to increase the intensityfor the upper body and improve mus-cular endurance. Warm-up and cool-down stretches should be included inthe aerobic workout.

2-16

Page 38: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

On today's battlefield, in addition tocardiorespiratory fitness, soldiers needa high level of muscular endurance andstrength. In a single day they maycarry injured comrades, move equip-ment, lift heavy tank or artillery rounds,push stalled vehicles, or do many otherstrength-related tasks. For example,based on computer-generated scenar-ios of an invasion of Western Europe,artillerymen may have to load from 300to 500, 155mm-howitzer rounds (95-lbrounds) while moving from 6 to 10times each day over 8 to 12 days. In-fantrymen may need to carry loadsexceeding 100 pounds over great dis-tances, while supporting units willdeploy and displace many times. In-deed, survival on the battlefield may,in large part, depend on the muscularendurance and strength of the individ-ual soldier.

Muscular Fitness

Muscular fitness has two compo-nents: muscular strength and muscularendurance.

Muscular strength is the greatestamount of force a muscle or musclegroup can exert in a single effort.

Muscular endurance is the ability ofa muscle or muscle group to do re-peated contractions against a less-than-maximum resistance for a given time.

Although muscular endurance andstrength are separate fitness compo-nents, they are closely related. Pro-gressively working against resistancewill produce gains in both of thesecomponents.

Muscular Contractions

Isometric, isotonic, and isokineticmuscular endurance and strength arebest produced by regularly doing eachspecific kind of contraction. They aredescribed here.

Isometric contraction produces con-traction but no movement, as whenpushing against a wall. Force is pro-duced with no change in the angle ofthe joint.

Isotonic contraction causes a jointto move through a range of motionagainst a constant resistance. Commonexamples are push-ups, sit-ups, andthe lifting of weights.

Isokinetic contraction causes theangle at the joint to change at aconstant rate, for example, at 180degrees per second. To achieve aconstant speed of movement, the loador resistance must change at differentjoint angles to counter the varyingforces produced by the muscle(s) atdifferent angles. This requires the useof isokinetic machines. There areother resistance-training machineswhich, while not precisely controllingthe speed of movement, affect it byvarying the resistance throughout therange of motion. Some of thesedevices are classified as pseudo-isoki-netic and some as variable-resistancemachines.

Isotonic and isokinetic contractionshave two specific phases - the concen-tric or “positive” phase and the eccen-tric or “negative” phase. In the concen-tric phase (shortening) the musclecontracts, while in the eccentric phase(elongation) the muscle returns to itsnormal length. For example, on theupward phase of the biceps curl, thebiceps are shortening. This is a con-centric (positive) contraction. Duringthe lowering phase of the curl thebiceps are lengthening. This is aneccentric (negative) contraction.

A muscle can control more weightin the eccentric phase of contractionthan it can lift concentrically. As aresult, the muscle may be able tohandle more of an overload eccentri-cally. This greater overload, in return,may produce greater strength gains.

3-1

Page 39: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

The nature of the eccentric contrac-tion, however, makes the muscle andconnective tissue more susceptible todamage, so there is more muscle sore-ness following eccentric work.

When a muscle is overloaded, whetherby isometric, isotonic, or isokineticcontractions, it adapts by becomingstronger. Each type of contraction hasadvantages and disadvantages, and eachwill result in strength gains if doneproperly.

The above descriptions are moreimportant to those who assess strengththan to average people trying to de-velop strength and endurance. Actu-ally, a properly designed weight train-ing program with free weights orresistance machines will result inimprovements in all three of thesecategories.

To understand the principle of over- load, it is important to know the following strength-training terms: • Full range of motion. To obtain optimal gains, the overload must be applied thoughout the full range of motion. Exercise a joint and its as- sociated muscles through its com- plete range starting from the pre- stretched position (stretched past the relaxed position) and ending in a fully contratcted position. This is crucial to strength development. • Repetition. When an exercise has progressed through one complete range of motion and back to the beginning, one repetition has been completed. • One-repetition maximum (1-RM). This is a repetition performed against the greatest possible resistance (the maximum weight a person can lift one time). A 10-RM is the maxi- mum weight one can lift correctly 10 times. Similarly, an 8-12 RM is that weight which allows a person to do from 8 to 12 correct repeti- tions. The intensity for muscular endurance and strength training is often expressed as a percentage of. the 1-RM. • Set. This is a series of repetitions done without rest. • Muscle Failure. This is the inabil- ity of a person to do another correct repetition in a set.

When a muscle is

overloaded by isometric,

isotonic, or isokinetic

contractions, it adapts by

becoming stronger.

Principles of MuscularTraining

To have a good exercise program,the seven principles of exercise, de-scribed in Chapter 1, must be appliedto all muscular endurance and strengthtraining. These principles are over-load, progression, specificity, regular-ity, recovery, balance, and variety.

OVERLOAD

The overload principle is the basisfor all exercise training programs. Fora muscle to increase in strength, theworkload to which it is subjectedduring exercise must be increasedbeyond what it normally experiences.In other words, the muscle must beoverloaded. Muscles adapt to in-creased workloads by becoming largerand stronger and by developing greaterendurance.

The minimum resistance needed toobtain strength gains is 50 percent ofthe 1 -RM. However, to achieve enoughoverload, programs are designed torequire sets with 70 to 80 percent ofone’s 1 -RM. (For example, if a sol-dier’s 1 -RM is 200 pounds, multiply200 pounds by 70 percent [200 X 0.70= 140 pounds] to get 70 percent of the1 -RM.)

3-2

Page 40: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

A better and easier method is therepetition maximum (RM) method. Theexerciser finds and uses that weightwhich lets him do the correct numberof repetitions. For example, to developboth muscle endurance and strength, asoldier should choose a weight for eachexercise which lets him do 8 to 12 repe-titions to muscle failure. (See Figure3-1.) The weight should be heavyenough so that, after doing from 8 to 12

Figure 3-1

repetitions, he momentarily cannotcorrectly do another repetition. Thisweight is the 8-12 RM for that exer-cise.

MUSCULAR ENDURANCE/STRENGTH DEVELOPMENT

To develop muscle strength, theweight selected should be heavier andthe RM will also be different. For ex-ample, the soldier should find thatweight for each exercise which letshim do 3 to 7 repetitions correctly.This weight is the 3-7 RM for thatexercise. Although the greatest im-provements seem to come from resis-tances of about 6-RM, an effectiverange is a 3-7 RM. The weight shouldbe heavy enough so that an eighthrepetition would be impossible be-cause of muscle fatigue.

The weight should also not be tooheavy. If one cannot do at least threerepetitions of an exercise, the resis-tance is too great and should be re-duced. Soldiers who are just begin-ning a resistance-training programshould not start with heavy weights.They should first build an adequatefoundation by training with an 8-12RM or a 12+ RM.

To develop muscular endurance,the soldier should choose a resistancethat lets him do more than 12 repeti-tions of a given exercise. This is his12+ repetition maximum (12+ RM).With continued training, the greaterthe number of repetitions per set, thegreater will be the improvement inmuscle endurance and the smaller thegains in strength. For example, whena soldier trains with a 25-RM weight,gains in muscular endurance will begreater than when using a 15-RMweight, but the gain in strength willnot be as great. To optimize a soldier’sperformance, his RM should be deter-mined from an analysis of the criticaltasks of his mission. However, mostsoldiers will benefit most from a resis-tance-training program with an 8-12RM.

3-3

Page 41: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Whichever RM range is selected,the soldier must always strive to over-load his muscles. The key to overload-ing a muscle is to make that muscleexercise harder than it normally does.

An overload may be achieved by any of the following methods: • Increasing the resistance. • Increasing the number of repeti- tions per set. • Increasing the number of sets. • Reducing the rest time between sets. • Increasing the speed of movement in the concentric phase. (Good form is more important than the speed of movement.) • Using any combination of the above.

PROGRESSION

When an overload is applied to amuscle, it adapts by becoming strongerand/or by improving its endurance.Usually significant increases in strengthcan be made in three to four weeks ofproper training depending on the in-dividual. If the workload is not pro-gressively increased to keep pace withnewly won strength, there will be nofurther gains. When a soldier can cor-rectly do the upper limit of repetitionsfor the set without reaching musclefailure, it is usually time to increasethe resistance. For most soldiers, thisupper limit should be 12 repetitions.

For example, if his plan is to do 12repetitions in the bench press, thesoldier starts with a weight that causesmuscle failure at between 8 and 12repetitions (8- 12 RM). He shouldcontinue with that weight until he cando 12 repetitions correctly. He thenshould increase the weight by about 5percent but no more than 10 percent.In a multi-set routine, if his goal is todo three sets of eight repetitions of anexercise, he starts with a weight thatcauses muscle failure before he com -

pletes the eighth repetition in one ormore of the sets. He continues to workwith that weight until he can completeall eight repetitions in each set, thenincreases the resistance by no morethan 10 percent.

SPECIFICITY

A resistance-training program shouldprovide resistance to the specific musclegroups that need to be strengthened.These groups can be identified bydoing a simple assessment. The soldierslowly does work-related movementshe wants to improve and, at the sametime, he feels the muscles on each sideof the joints where motion occurs.Those muscles that are contracting orbecoming tense during the movementare the muscle groups involved. If thesoldier’s performance of a task is notadequate or if he wishes to improve,strength training for the identifiedmuscle(s) will be beneficial. To im-prove his muscular endurance andstrength. in a given task, the soldiermust do resistance movements that areas similar as possible to those of doingthe task. In this way, he ensuresmaximum carryover value to his sol-diering tasks.

REGULARITY

Exercise must be done regularly toproduce a training effect. Sporadicexercise may do more harm than good.Soldiers can maintain a moderate levelof strength by doing proper strengthworkouts only once a week, but threeworkouts per week are best for optimalgains. The principle of regularity alsoapplies to the exercises for individualmuscle groups. A soldier can work outthree times a week, but when differentmuscle groups are exercised at eachworkout, the principle of regularity isviolated and gains in strength areminimal.

Exercise must be done

regularly to produce a

training effect.

3-4

Page 42: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

RECOVERY

There should be at

least a 48-hour recovery

period between workouts

for the same muscle

group.

Consecutive days of hard resistancetraining for the same muscle group canbe detrimental. The muscles must beallowed sufficient recovery time toadapt. Strength training can be doneevery day only if the exercised musclegroups are rotated, so that the samemuscle or muscle group is not exercisedon consecutive days. There should beat least a 48-hour recovery periodbetween workouts for the same musclegroups. For example, the legs can betrained with weights on Monday,Wednesday, and Friday and the upperbody muscles on Tuesday, Thursday,and Saturday.

Recovery is also important within aworkout. The recovery time betweendifferent exercises and sets depends, inpart, on the intensity of the workout.Normally, the recovery time betweensets should be 30 to 180 seconds.

BALANCE

When developing a strength trainingprogram, it is important to include

It is important to exercises that work all the major muscle

include exercises that groups in both the upper and lower

work all the major body. One should not work just the

muscle groups in both upper body, thinking that running will

the upper and lower strengthen the legs.

body. Most muscles are organized intoopposing pairs. Activating one muscleresults in a pulling motion, while acti-vating the opposing muscle results inthe opposite, or pushing, movement.When planning a training session, it isbest to follow a pushing exercise witha pulling exercise which results inmovement at the same joint(s). Forexample, follow an overhead presswith a lat pull-down exercise. Thistechnique helps ensure good strengthbalance between opposing muscle groupswhich may, in turn, reduce the risk ofinjury. Sequence the program to exer-cise the larger muscle groups first, then

the smaller muscIes. For example, thelat pull-down stresses both the largerlatissimus dorsi muscle of the back andthe smaller biceps muscles of the arm.If curls are done first, the smallermuscle group will be exhausted andtoo weak to handle the resistanceneeded for the lat pull-down. As aresult, the soldier cannot do as manyrepetitions with as much weight as henormally could in the lat pull-down.The latissimus dorsi muscles will notbe overloaded and, as a result, theymay not benefit very much from theworkout.

The best sequence to follow for atotal-body strength workout is to firstexercise the muscles of the hips andlegs, followed by the muscles of theupper back and chest, then the arms,abdominal, low back, and neck. Aslong as all muscle groups are exercisedat the proper intensity, improvementwill occur.

VARIETY

A major challenge for all fitnesstraining programs is maintaining en-thusiasm and interest. A poorly de-signed strength- training program canbe very boring. Using different equip-ment, changing the exercises, and al-tering the volume and intensity aregood ways to add variety, and theymay also produce better results. Thesoldier should periodically substitutedifferent exercises for a given musclegroup(s). For example, he can dosquats with a barbell instead of legpresses on a weight machine. Also, forvariety or due to necessity (for ex-ample, when in the field), he canswitch to partner-resisted exercises oranother form of resistance training.However, frequent wholesale changesshould be avoided as soldiers maybecome frustrated if they do not haveenough time to adapt or to see im-provements in strength.

3-5

Page 43: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Workout Techniques

Workouts for improving muscularendurance or strength must follow theprinciples just described. There arealso other factors to consider, namely,safety, exercise selection, and phasesof conditioning.

SAFETY FACTORS

Major causes of injury when strengthtraining are improper lifting tech-niques combined with lifting weightsthat are too heavy. Each soldier mustunderstand how to do each lift cor-rectly before he starts his strengthtraining program.

The soldier should always do weighttraining with a partner, or spotter,who can observe his performance as heexercises. To ensure safety and thebest results, both should know how touse the equipment and the properspotting technique for each exercise.

A natural tendency in strength train-ing is to see how much weight one canlift. Lifting too much weight forces acompromise in form and may lead toinjury. All weights should be selectedso that proper form can be maintainedfor the appropriate number of repeti-tions.

Correct breathing is another safetyfactor in strength training. Breathingshould be constant during exercise.The soldier should never hold hisbreath, as this can cause dizziness andeven loss of consciousness. As ageneral rule, one should exhale duringthe positive (concentric) phase ofcontraction as the weight or weightstack moves away from the floor, andinhale during the negative (eccentric)phase as the weight returns toward thefloor.

The three phases of

conditioning are

preparatory, conditioning,

and maintenance.

EXERCISE SELECTION

When beginning a resistance-train-ing program, the soldier should choose

about 8 to 16 exercises that work all ofthe body’s major muscle groups. Usu-ally eight well-chosen exercises willserve as a good starting point. Theyshould include those for the muscles ofthe leg, low back, shoulders, and soforth. The soldier should choose exer-cises that work several muscle groupsand try to avoid those that isolate singlemuscle groups. This will help him traina greater number of muscles in a giventime. For example, doing lat pull-downs on the “lat machine” works thelatissimus dorsi of the back and thebiceps muscles of the upper arm. Onthe other hand, an exercise like con-centration curls for the biceps musclesof the upper arm, although an effectiveexercise, only works the arm flexormuscles. Also, the concentration curlrequires twice as much time as lat pull-downs because only one arm is workedat a time.

Perhaps a simpler way to select anexercise is to determine the number ofjoints in the body where movement oc-curs during a repetition. For mostpeople, especially beginners, most ofthe exercises in the program should be“multi-joint” exercises. The exerciseshould provide movement at more thanone joint. For example, the pull-downexercise produces motion at both theshoulder and elbow joints. The con-centration curl, however, only involvesthe elbow joint.

PHASES OF CONDITIONING

There are three phases of condition-ing: preparatory, conditioning, andmaintenance. These are also describedin Chapter 1.

Preparatory Phase

The soldier should use very lightweights during the first week (thepreparatory phase) which includes thefirst two to three workouts. This isvery important, because the beginnermust concentrate at first on learning

3-6

Page 44: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

the proper form for each exercise.Using light weights also helps mini-mize muscle soreness and decreases thelikelihood of injury to the muscles,joints, and ligaments. During thesecond week, he should use progres-sively heavier weights. By the end ofthe second week (4 to 6 workouts), heshould know how much weight on eachexercise will allow him to do 8 to 12repetitions to muscle failure. If he cando only seven repetitions of an exer-cise, the weight must be reduced; if hecan do more than 12, the weight shouldbe increased.

Conditioning Phase

The third week is normally the startof the conditioning phase for the be-ginning weight trainer. During thisphase, the soldier should increase theamount of weight used and/or theintensity of the workout as his muscu-lar strength and/or endurance increases.He should do one set of 8 to 12repetitions for each of the heavy-resistance exercises. When he can domore than 12 repetitions of any exer-cise, he should increase the weightuntil he can again do only 8 to 12 repe-titions. This usually involves an in-crease in weight of about five percent.This process continues indefinitely. Aslong as he continues to progress and getstronger, he does not need to do morethan one set per exercise. If he stopsmaking progress with one set of 8 to 12repetitions per exercise, he may bene-fit from adding another set of 8 to 12repetitions on those exercises in whichprogress has slowed. As time goes onand he progresses, he may increase thenumber to three sets of an exercise toget even further gains in strength and/or muscle mass. Three sets per exer-cise is the maximum most soldiers willever need to do.

Maintenance Phase

Once the soldier reaches a highlevel of fitness, the maintenance phaseis used to maintain that level. Theemphasis in this phase is no longer onprogression but on retention. Al-though training three times a week formuscle endurance and strength givesthe best results, one can maintain themby training the major muscle groupsproperly one or two times a week.More frequent training, however, isrequired to reach and maintain peakfitness levels. Maintaining the optimallevel of fitness should become part ofeach soldier’s life-style and trainingroutine. The maintenance phase shouldbe continued throughout his careerand, ideally, throughout his life.

As with aerobic training, the sol-dier should do strength training threetimes a week and should allow at least48 hours of rest from resistance train-ing between workouts for any givenmuscle group.

TIMED SETS

Timed sets refers to a method ofphysical training in which as manyrepetitions as possible of a given exer-cise are performed in a specified pe-riod of time. After an appropriateperiod of rest, a second, third, and soon, set of that exercise is done in anequal or lesser time period. Theexercise period, recovery period, andthe number of sets done should beselected to make sure that an overloadof the involved muscle groups occurs.

The use of timed sets, unlike exer-cises performed in cadence or for aspecific number of repetitions, helpsto ensure that each soldier does asmany repetitions of an exercise as pos-sible within a period of time. Itdoes not hold back the more capable

3-7

Page 45: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

performer by restricting the numberof repetitions he may do. Instead, sol-diers at all levels of fitness can indi-vidually do the number of repetitionsthey are capable of and thereby besure they obtain an adequate trainingstimulus.

In this FM, timed sets will beapplied to improving soldier’s sit-upand push-up performance. (See Fig-ures 3-2 and 3-3. ) Many differentbut equally valid approaches can betaken when using timed sets to im-prove push-up and sit-up perform-ance. Below, several of these will begiven.

It should first be stated that im-proving sit-up and push-up perform-ance, although important for the APFT,should not be the main goal of anArmy physical training program. Itmust be to develop an optimal level ofphysical fitness which will help sol-diers carry out their mission duringcombat. Thus, when a soldier per-forms a workout geared to developmuscle endurance and strength, thegoal should be to develop sufficientstrength and/or muscle endurance inall the muscle groups he will be calledupon to use as he performs his mission.To meet this goal, and to be assuredthat all emergencies can be met, atraining regimen which exercises all

be developed and followed. Thus, asa general rule, a muscle endurance orstrength training workout should notbe designed to work exclusively, orgive priority to, those muscle groupsworked by the sit-up or push-up event.

For this reason, the best procedureto follow when doing a resistanceexercise is as follows. First, perform aworkout to strengthen all of the body’smajor muscles. Then, do timed sets toimprove push-up and sit-up perform-ance. Following this sequence ensuresthat all major muscles are worked. Atthe same time, it reduces the amount oftime and work that must be devoted topush-ups and sit-ups. This is becausethe muscles worked by those two exer-cises will already be pre-exhausted.

The manner in which timed sets forpush-ups and sit-ups are conductedshould occasionally be varied. Thisensures continued gains and minimizesboredom. This having been said, hereis a very time-efficient way of con-ducting push-up/sit-up improvement.Alternate timed sets of push-ups andtimed sets of sit-ups with little or notime between sets allowed for recov-ery. In this way, the muscle groupsused by the push-up can recover whilethe muscles used in the sit-up areexercised, and vice versa. The follow-ing is an example of this type of

the body’s major muscle groups must approach:

Figure 3-2

3-8

Page 46: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

If all soldiers exercise at the sametime, the above activity can be finishedin about 3.5 minutes. As the soldiers’levels of fitness improve, the difficultyof the activity can be increased. Thisis done by lengthening the time periodof any or all timed sets, by decreasingany rest period between timed sets, byincreasing the number of timed setsperformed, or by any combination ofthese.

To add variety and increase theoverall effectiveness of the activity,different types of push-ups (regular,feet-elevated, wide-hand, close-hand,and so forth) and sit-ups (regular,abdominal twists, abdominal curls, andso forth) can be done. When perform-ing this type of workout, pay attentionto how the soldiers are responding, andmake adjustments accordingly. Forexample, the times listed in the chartabove may prove to be too long or tooshort for some soldiers. In the sameway, because of the nature of the sit-up, it may become apparent that somesoldiers can benefit by taking slightlymore time for timed sets of sit-upsthan for push-ups.

When using timed sets for push-upand sit-up improvement, soldiers can

before doing the other. For example,several timed sets of push-ups can bedone followed by several sets of sit-ups, or vice versa. With this approach,rest intervals must be placed betweentimed sets. The following example canbe done after the regular strengthworkout and is reasonable startingroutine for most soldiers.

During a timed set of push-ups, asoldier may reach temporary musclefailure at any time before the set isover. If this happens, he shouldimmediately drop to his knees andcontinue doing modified push-ups onhis knees.

Finally, as in any endeavor, soldiersmust set goals for themselves. Thisapplies when doing each timed set andwhen planning for their next andfuture APFTs.

Major Muscle Groups

In designing a workout it is impor-tant to know the major muscle groups,where they are located, and their pri-mary action. (See Figure 3-4.)

To ensure a good, balanced work-out, one must do at least one set ofexercises for each of the major muscle

also perform all sets of one exercise groups.

Figure 3-3

3-9

Page 47: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 3-4

Figure 3-5

Page 48: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

The beginning weight-training pro- gram shown at Figure 3-5 will work

most of the important, major musclegroups. It is a good program for begin-ners and for those whose time islimited. The exercises should be donein the order presented.

The weight-training program shownat Figure 3-6 is a more comprehensiveprogram that works the major musclegroups even more thoroughly. It hassome duplication with respect to the

lat pull-down, and biceps curl. Thus,for the beginner, this program mayoverwork some muscle groups. How-ever, for the more advanced lifter, itwill make the muscles work in differ-ent ways and from different anglesthereby providing a better over-alldevelopment of muscle strength. Thisprogram also includes exercises tostrengthen the neck muscles.

When doing one set of each exerciseto muscle failure, the average soldier.

muscles that are worked. For example, should be able to complete this routinethe quadriceps are worked by the leg and do a warm-up and cool-downpress/squat and leg extensions, and the within the regular PT time.biceps are worked by the seated row,

Figure 3-6

3-11

Page 49: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Key Points to Emphasize

Some key points to emphasize whendoing resistance training tire as fol-lows● Train with a partner if possible,

This helps to increase motivation,the intensity of the workout, andsafety,

● Always breathe when lifting. Exhaleduring the concentric (positive] phaseof contraction, and inhale duringthe eccentric (negative) phase,

● Accelerate the weight through theconcentric phase of contraction,and return the weight to the startingposition in a controlled mannerduring the eccentric phase,

● Exercise the large muscle groupsfirst, then the smaller ones.

● Perform all exercises through theirfull range of motion. Begin from afully extended, relaxed position (pre-stretched), and end the concentricphase in a fully contracted position,

● Always use strict form. Do nottwist, lurch, lunge, or arch thebody, This can cause serious in-jury. These motions also detractfrom the effectiveness of the exer-cise because they take much of thestress off the targeted muscle groupsand place it on other muscles.

● Rest from 30 to 180 seconds be-tween different exercises and setsof a given exercise.

�● Allow at least 48 hours of recoverybetween workouts, but not morethan 96 hours, to let the body re-cover and help prevent over train-ing and injury.

● Progress slowly, Never increase theresistance used by more than 10percent at a time.

● Alternate pulling and pushing exer-cises. For example, follow tricepsextensions with biceps curls .

● Ensure that every training programis balanced. Train the whole body,not just specific areas. Concentrat-ing on weak areas is all right, butthe rest of the body must also betrained.

Exercise Programs

When developing strength programsfor units, there are limits to the type oftraining that can be done. The availa-bility of facilities is always a majorconcern. Although many installationshave excellent strength-training fa-cilities, it is unreasonable to expect thatall units can use them on a regularbasis. However, the development ofstrength does not require expensiveequipment. All that is required is forthe soldier, three times a week, toprogressively overload his muscles.

TRAINING WITHOUT SPECIALEQUIPMENT

Muscles do not care what is supply-ing the resistance. Any regular resis-tance exercise that makes the musclework harder than it is used to causes itto adapt and become stronger. Whetherthe training uses expensive machines,sandbags, or partners, the result islargely the same.

Sandbags are convenient for train-ing large numbers of soldiers, as theyare available in all military units. Theweight of the bags can be varieddepending on the amount of fill.Sandbag exercises are very effective instrength-training circuits. Logs, ammoboxes, dummy rounds, or other equip-ment that is unique to a unit can alsobe used to provide resistance for strengthtraining. Using a soldier’s own bodyweight as the resistive force is anotherexcellent alternative method of strengthtraining. Pull-ups, push-ups, dips, sit-ups, and single-leg squats are examplesof exercises which use a person’s bodyweight. They can improve an un-trained soldier’s level of strength.

Partner-resisted exercises (PREs) areanother good way to develop muscularstrength without equipment, especiallywhen training large numbers of sol-diers at one time. As with all training,safety is a critical factor. Soldiersshould warm up, cool down, and followthe principles of exercise previouslyoutlined.

3-12

Page 50: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

PARTNER-RESISTED EXERCISE

In partner-resisted exercises (PREs)a person exercises against a partner’sopposing resistance. The longer thepartners work together, the moreeffective they should become in pro-viding the proper resistance for eachexercise. They must communicate witheach other to ensure that neither toomuch nor too little resistance is ap-plied. The resister must apply enoughresistance to bring the exerciser tomuscle failure in 8 to 12 repetitions.More resistance usual] y can and shouldbe applied during the eccentric (nega-tive) phase of contraction (in otherwords, the second half of each repe-tition as the exerciser returns to thestarting position). The speed of move-ment for PREs should always be slowand controlled. As a general rule, thenegative part of each exercise should

take at least as long to complete asthe positive part. Proper exerciseform and regularity in perform-ance are key ingredients whenusing PREs for improving strength.

Following are descriptions andillustrations of several PREs. Theyshould be done in the order givento ensure that the exercising sol-dier is working his muscle groupsfrom the largest to the smallest.More than one exercise per musclegroup may be used. The PT leadercan select exercises which meet theunit’s specific goals while consid-ering individual limitations:

A 36-to 48-inch stick or bar oneinch in diameter may be used forsome of the exercises. This givesthe resister a better grip and/orleverage and also provides a feelsimilar to that of free weights andexercise machines.

3-13

Page 51: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-14

Page 52: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-15

Page 53: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-16

Page 54: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-17

Page 55: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-18

Page 56: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-19

Page 57: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-20

Page 58: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

TRAINING WITH EQUIPMENT

Units in garrison usually have access toweight rooms with basic equipment forresistance-training exercises. The ex-ercises described here require freeweights and supporting equipment.Although not shown below for the sakeof simplicity, all exercises done withfree weights require a partner, orspotter, to ensure proper form and thesafety of the lifter.

Free-Weight Exercises

3-21

Page 59: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-22

Page 60: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-23

Page 61: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-24

Page 62: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-25

Page 63: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Exercises Performed with anExercise Machine

If exercise machines are available, eccentric (negative) phase of con-the exercises described below are traction, should be done in a delib-also good for strength training. All crate, controlled manner.movements, particularly during the

3-26

Page 64: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-27

Page 65: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-28

Page 66: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-29

Page 67: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-30

Page 68: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-31

Page 69: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-32

Page 70: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

The following exercises can be per- obliques). As the soldier becomesformed to condition the muscles of the more conditioned on these exer-mid-section (erector spinae, rectus cises, resistance can be added.abdominus and external and internal

3-33

Page 71: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-34

Page 72: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Exercise Chart

The chart labeled Figure 3-5 will help thesoldier select appropriate exercises for use indeveloping a good muscular endurance and strengthworkout. For example, if the soldier wants todevelop his upper leg muscles, he has severaloptions. He may choose from the following: 1)PREs, concentrating on the split- or single-legsquat; 2) exercises with equipment, doing freeweight squats; or, 3) exercises with a machine,doing leg presses, leg curls, and leg extensions.

3-35

Page 73: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

3-36

Page 74: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Flexibility refers to the

range of movement of a

joint.

Flexibility is a component of physi-cal fitness. Developing and maintain-ing it are important parts of a fitnessprogram. Good flexibility can help asoldier accomplish such physical tasksas lifting, loading, climbing, parachut-ing, running, and rappelling with greaterefficiency and less risk of injury.

Flexibility is the range of movementof a joint or series of joints and theirassociated muscles. It involves theability to move a part of the bodythrough the full range of motion al-lowed by normal, disease-free joints.

No one test can measure total-bodyflexibility. However, field tests can beused to assess flexibility in the ham-string and low-back areas. These areasare commonly susceptible to injurydue, in part, to loss of flexibility. Asimple toe-touch test can be used.Soldiers shouId stand with their legsstraight and feet together and bendforward slowly at the waist. A soldierwho cannot touch his toes withoutbouncing or bobbing needs work toimprove his flexibility in the musclegroups stretched by this test. Theunit’s Master Fitness Trainer can helphim design a stretching program toimprove his flexibility.

Stretching during the warm-up andcool-down helps soldiers maintainoverall flexibility. Stretching shouldnot be painful, but it should cause somediscomfort because the muscles arebeing stretched beyond their normallength. Because people differ some-what anatomically, comparing oneperson’s flexibility with another’s shouldnot be done. People with poor flexi-bility who try to stretch as far as othersmay injure themselves.T h e f o u r c a t e g o r i e s o f

s t r e t ch ing t echn iques are

static,passive,

proprioceptive

neuromuscular

faci l i tat ion (PNF), and

ballistic.

Stretching Techniques

Using good stretching techniquescan improve flexibility. There are fourcommonly recognized categories ofstretching techniques: static, passive,proprioceptive neuromuscular facili-tation (PNF), and ballistic. These are

described here and shown later in thischapter.

STATIC STRETCHING

Static stretching involves the grad-ual lengthening of muscles and ten-dons as a body part moves around ajoint. It is a safe and effective methodfor improving flexibility. The soldierassumes each stretching position slowlyuntil he feels tension or tightness. Thislengthens the muscles without causinga reflex contraction in the stretchedmuscles. He should hold each stretchfor ten seconds or longer. This lets thelengthened muscles adjust to the stretchwithout causing injury.

The longer a stretch is held, theeasier it is for the muscle to adapt tothat length. Static stretching shouldnot be painful. The soldier should feelslight discomfort, but no pain. Whenpain results from stretching, it is a sig-nal that he is stretching a muscle ortendon too much and may be causingdamage.

PASSIVE STRETCHING

Passive stretching involves the sol-dier’s use of a partner or equipment,such as a towel, pole, or rubber tubing,to help him stretch. This produces asafe stretch through a range of motionhe could not achieve without help. Heshould talk with his partner to ensurethat each muscle is stretched safelythrough the entire range of motion.

PNF STRETCHING

PNF stretching uses the neuromus-cular patterns of each muscle group tohelp improve flexibility. The soldierperforms a series of intense contrac-tions and relaxations using a partner orequipment to help him stretch. ThePNF technique allows for greater musclerelaxation following each contractionand increases the soldier’s ability tostretch through a greater range ofmotion.

4-1

Page 75: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

BALLISTIC STRETCHING

Ballistic, or dynamic, stretching in-volves movements such as bouncing orbobbing to attain a greater range ofmotion and stretch. Although thismethod may improve flexibility, itoften forces a muscle to stretch too farand may result in an injury. Individu-als and units should not use ballisticstretching.

FITT Factors

Commanders should include stretch-ing exercises in all physical fitnessprograms.

The following FITT factors applywhen developing a flexibility program.Frequency: Do flexibility exercises daily. Do them during the warm-up to help prepare the muscles for vig- orous activity and to help reduce in- jury. Do them during the cool- down to help maintain flexibility.Intensity: Stretch a muscle beyond its normal length to the point of tension or slight discomfort, not pain. Time: Hold stretches for 10 to 15 sec- onds for warming up and cooling down and for 30 seconds or longer t o i m p r o v e f l e x i b i l i t y . Type: Use static stretches, assumed slowly and gradually, as well as pas- sive stretching and/or PNF stretch- ing.

A recommended sequence of warm-up activities follows. Soldiers shoulddo these for five to seven minutes b e f o r e v i g o r o u s e x e r c i s e .• Slow joggin-in-place or walking for one to two minutes. This causes a gradual increase in the heart rate, blood pressure, circulation, and in- creases the temperature of the ac- t i v e m u s c l e s . • Slow joint rotation exercises (for example, arm circles, knee/ankle rotations) to gradually increase the joint's range of motion. Work each major joint for 5 to 10 seconds. • Slow, static stretching of the muscles to be used during the upcoming ac- tivity. This will "loosen up" muscles and tendons so they can achieve greater ranges of motion with less risk of injury. Hold each stretch position for 10 to 15 seconds, and do not bounce or bob. • Calisthenic exerciese, as described in Chapter 7, to increase the inten- sity level before the activity or con- ditioning period. • Slowly mimic the activities to be performed. For example, lift a lighter weight to warm-up before lifting a heavier one. This helps prepare the neuromuscular path- ways.

Warm-Up and Cool-Down

The warm-up and cool-down arevery important parts of a physicaltraining session, and stretching exer-cises should be a major part of both.

THE WARM-UP

Before beginning any vigorousThe warm-up warms themuscIes, increasing the

physical activity, one should prepare flow of blood andthe body for exercise. The warm-up reducing the risk ofincreases the flow of blood to the injury.muscles and tendons, thus helpingreduce the risk of injury. It alsoincreases the joint’s range of motionand positively affects the speed ofmuscular contraction.

4-2

Page 76: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

THE COOL-DOWN The soldier should not limit flexi-bility training to just the warm-up and

The following information explainsthe importance of cooling down andhow to do it correctly. • Do not stop suddenly after vigorous exercise, as this can be very danger- ous. Gradually bring the body back to its resting state by slowly de- creasing the intensity of the activ- ity. After running, for example, one should walk for one to two min- utes. Stopping exercise suddenly can cause blood to pool in the muscles, thereby reducing blood flow to the heart and brain. This may cause fainting or abnormal rhythms in the heart which could lead to serious complications. • Repeat the stretches done in the warm-up to help ease muscle ten- sion and any immediate feeling of muscle soreness. Be careful not to overstretch. The muscles are warm from activity and can possibly be overstretched to the point of injury. • Hold stretches 30 seconds or more during the cool-down to improve flexiblity. Use partner-assisted or PNF techniques, if possible.

cool-down periods. He should some-times use an entire PT session on a"recovery" or "easy"training day towork on flexibility improvement. Hemay also work on it at home. Stretch-ing is one form of exercise that takesvery little time relative to the benefitsgained.

R o t a t i o n E x e r c i s e s

Rotation exercises are used to gen-tly stretch the tendons, ligments, andmuscles associated with a joint and tostimulate lubrication of the joint withsynovial fluid. This may providebetter movement and less friction inthe joint. The following exercises should beperformed slowly.

4-3

Page 77: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-4

Page 78: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Common Stretching Exercises

The following exercises improveflexibility when performed slowly,regularly, and with gradual progres-sion. Static, passive and PNF stretchesare shown.CAUTION Some of these exercisesmay be difficult or too strenuous forunfit or medically limited soldiers.Common sense should be used ;n se-lecting stretching exercises.

STATIC STRETCHES

Assume all stretching positionsslowly until you feel tension or slightdiscomfort. Hold each position for atleast 10 to 15 seconds during thewarm-up and cool-down. Develop-mental stretching to improve flexibil-ity requires holding each stretch for30 seconds or longer.Choose the appropriate stretch forthe muscle groups which you will beworking.

4-5

Page 79: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-6

Page 80: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-7

Page 81: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-8

Page 82: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-9

Page 83: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-10

Page 84: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-11

Page 85: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-12

Page 86: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-13

Page 87: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

PASSIVE STRETCHES

Passive stretching is done with the help of a with a partner. When stretching alone, using apartner or equipment. The examples in this chap- towel may help the exerciser achieve a greaterter show passive stretching done with a towel or range of motion.

4-14

Page 88: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-15

Page 89: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Soldiers can do PNF (Propriocep-t ive Neuromuscular Facil i tat ion)stretches for most major muscle groups.PNF stretches use a series of contrac-tions, done against a partner’s resis-tance, and relaxations.

Obtaining a safe stretch beyond themuscle’s normal length requires a part-ner’s assistance. The following foursteps provide general guidance as tohow PNF stretches are done. Both theexerciser and partner should followthese instructions:1. Assume the stretch position slowlywith the partner’s help.2. Isometrically contract the musclesto be stretched. Hold the contraction

for 5 to 10 seconds against the partner’sunyielding resistance.3. Relax. Next, contract the antago-nistic muscles for 5 to 10 seconds whilethe partner helps the exerciser obtain agreater stretch.4. Repeat this sequence three times,and try to stretch a little further eachtime. (Caution: The exerciser shouldnot hold his breath. He should breatheout during each contraction.)

Several examples of PNF stretchesare provided below in a stepwise fash-ion. The numbers given above for eachstep correspond to the general descrip-tion listed below.

4-16

Page 90: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

4-17

Page 91: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Body composition, which refers tothe body’s relative amounts of fat andlean body mass (organs, bones, muscles),is one of the five components ofphysical fitness. Good body composi-tion is best gained through proper dietand exercise. Examples of poor bodycomposition are underdeveloped mus-culature or excessive body fat. Beingoverweight (that is, overly fat) is themore common problem.

Poor body composition causes prob-lems for the Army. Soldiers withinadequate muscle development can-not perform as well as soldiers withgood body composition. As a soldiergets fat, his ability to perform physi-cally declines, and his risk of develop-ing disease increases. Soldiers withhigh percentages of body fat oftenhave lower APFT scores than thosewith lower percentages. Poor bodycomposition, especially obesity, has anegative effect on appearance, self--esteem, and negatively influences at-titude and morale.

The Army’s weight control pro-gram is described in AR 600-9. It ad-dresses body composition standards,programs for the overly fat, and re-lated administrative actions.

The amount of fat on the body,when expressed as a percentage oftotal body weight, is referred to as the

percent body fat. The Army’s maxi-mum allowable percentages of bodyfat, by age and sex, are listed in Figure5-1.

Evaluation Methods

The Army determines body fatpercentage using the girth method.(This is described in AR 600-9, pages12 to 21.)

Body composition is influenced byage, diet, fitness level, and geneticfactors (gender and body type). TheArmy’s screening charts for height andweight (shown in AR 600-9) make al-lowances for these differences. Asoldier whose weight exceeds the stan-dard weight shown on the charts maynot necessarily be overfat. For ex-ample, some well-muscled athletes havebody weights that far exceed the valuesfor weight listed on the charts for theirage, gender, and height. Yet, only asmall percentage of their total bodymass may be fat. In such cases, the leanbody mass accounts for a large share oftheir total body composition, whileonly a small percentage of the totalbody mass is composed of fat.

Soldiers who do not meet the weightstandards for their height and/or sol-diers whose appearance suggests thatthey have excessive fat are to beevaluated using the circumference (girthmeasurement) method described inAR 600-9.

Body composition is

influenced by age,

fitness level, and

genetic factors.

Figure 5-1

5 - 0

Page 92: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

A more accurate way to determinebody composition is by hydrostatic orunderwater weighing. However, thismethod is very time-consuming andexpensive and usually done only athospitals and universities.

Soldiers who do not meet Armybody fat standards are placed on for-mal, supervised weight (fat) loss pro-grams as stipulated in AR 600-9. Suchprograms include sensible diet and ex-ercise regimens.

Diet and Exercise

A combination of exercise and dietis the best way to lose excessive bodyfat. Losing one to two pounds a weekis a realistic goal which is best accom-plished by reducing caloric intake andincreasing energy expenditure. Inother words, one should eat less andexercise more. Dieting alone can causethe body to believe it is being starved.In response, it tries to conserve its fatreserves by slowing down its metabolicrate and, as a result, it loses fat at aslower rate.

Soldiers must consume a minimumnumber of calories from all the majorfood groups, with the calories distrib-uted over all the daily meals includingsnacks. This ensures an adequate con-sumption of necessary vitamins and

A combination of

exercise and diet is the

best way to lose

unwanted body fat.

minerals. A male soldier who is notunder medical supervision when diet-ing requires a caloric intake of at least1 ,500; women require at least 1,200calories. Soldiers should avoid dietsthat fail to meet these criteria.

Trying to lose weight with fad dietsand devices or by skipping meals doesnot work for long-term fat loss, sinceweight lost through these practices ismostly water and lean muscle tissue,not fat. Losing fat safely takes time

and patience. There is no quick andeasy way to improve body composi-tion.

The soldier who diets and does notexercise loses not only fat but muscletissue as well. This can negativelyaffect his physical readiness. Not onlydoes exercise burn calories, it helps thebody maintain its useful muscle mass,and it may also help keep the body’smetabolic rate high during dieting.

Fat can only be burned duringexercise if oxygen is used. Aerobicexercise, which uses lots of oxygen, isthe best type of activity for burningfat. Aerobic exercises include jog-ging, walking, swimming, bicycling,cross-country skiing, rowing, stairclimbing, exercise to music, and jump-ing rope. Anaerobic activities, such assprinting or lifting heavy weights,burn little, if any, fat.

Exercise alone is not the best way tolose body fat, especially in largeamounts. For an average-sized per-son, running or walking one mileburns about 100 calories. Becausethere are 3,500 calories in one poundof fat, he needs to run or walk 35 milesif pure fat were being burned. In re-ality, fat is seldom the only source ofenergy used during aerobic exercise.Instead, a mixture of both fats andcarbohydrates is used. As a result,most people would need to run or walkover 50 miles to burn one pound of fat.

A combination of proper diet andaerobic exercise is the proven way tolose excessive body fat. Local dieti-tians and nutritionists can help soldierswho want to lose weight by suggestingsafe and sensible diet programs. Inaddition, the unit’s MFT can designtailored exercise programs which willhelp soldiers increase their caloricexpenditure and maintain their leanbody mass.

Aerobic exercise is best

for burning fat.

examples include

jogging, walking, swim-

ming, bicycling, cross-

country skiing, and

rowing.

5-1

Page 93: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

In addition to exercise, proper nu-trition plays a major role in attainingand maintaining total fitness. Gooddietary habits (see Figure 6-1 ) greatlyenhance the ability of soldiers to per-form at their maximum potential. Agood diet alone, however, will notmake up for poor health and exercisehabits. This chapter gives basic nutri-tional guidance for enhancing physicalperformance. Soldiers must know andfollow the basic nutrition principles ifthey hope to maintain weight controlas well as achieve maximum physicalfitness, good health, and mental alert-ness.

Guidelines for Healthy Eating

Eating a variety of foods and main-taining an energy balance are basicguidelines for a healthy diet. Goodnutrition is not complicated for those

who understand these dietary guide-lines.

To be properly nourished, soldiersshould regularly eat a wide variety offoods fro-m the major food groups,selecting a variety of foods from withineach group. (See Figure 6-2.) A well-balanced diet provides all the nutrientsneeded to keep one healthy.

Most healthy adults do not needvitamin or mineral supplements if theyeat a proper variety of foods. Thereare no known advantages in consumingexcessive amounts of any nutrient, andthere may be risks in doing so.

For soldiers to get enough fuel fromthe food they eat and to obtain thevariety of foods needed for nutrientbalance, they should eat three meals aday. Even snacking between meals cancontribute to good nutrition if theright foods are eaten.

Another dietary guideline is toconsume enough calories to meet one’senergy needs. Weight is maintained aslong as the body is in energy balance,

Figure 6-1

6-0

Page 94: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 6-2

that is, when the number of caloriesused equals the number of caloriesconsumed.

The most accurate way to controlcaloric intake is to control the size offood portions and thus the total amountof food ingested. One can use standardhousehold measuring utensils and asmall kitchen scale to measure portionsof foods and beverages. Keeping adaily record of all foods eaten andphysical activity done is also helpful.

Figure 6-3 shows the number ofcalories burned during exercise periodsof different types, intensities, anddurations. For example, while partici-pating in archery, a person will burn0.034 calories per pound per minute.Thus, a 150-pound person would burn5.1 calories per minute (150 lbs. x 0.034calories/minute/lb. = 5.1 calories/minute) or about 305 calories/hour, as

shown in Figure 6-4. Similarly, aperson running at 6 miles per hour(MPH) will burn 0.079 cal./min./lb.and a typical, 150-pound male willburn 11.85 calories/minute (150 lbs. x0.079 cal./lb./min. = 11.85) or about710 calories in one hour, as shown inFigure 6-3.

To estimate the number of caloriesyou use in normal daily activity, multi-ply your body weight by 13 if you aresedentary, 14 if somewhat active, and15 if moderately active. The result isa rough estimate of the number ofcalories you need to maintain yourpresent body weight. You will needstill more calories if you are more thanmoderately active. By comparingcaloric intake with caloric expendi-ture, the state of energy balance (posi-tive, balanced, or negative) can bedetermined.

6-1

Page 95: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 6-3

6-2

Page 96: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Avoiding an excessive

intake of fats is an

important fundamental

of nutrition.

Avoiding an excessive intake of fatsis another fundamental dietary guide-line. A high intake of fats, especiallysaturated fats and cholesterol, has beenassociated with high levels of bloodcholesterol.

The blood cholesterol level in mostAmericans is too high. Blood choles-terol levels can be lowered by reducingboth body fat and the amount of fat inthe diet. Lowering elevated bloodcholesterol levels reduces the risk ofdeveloping coronary artery disease(CAD) and of having a heart attack.CAD, a slow, progressive disease, re-sults from the clogging of blood vesselsin the heart. Good dietary habits helpreduce the likelihood of developingCAD.

It is recommended that all personsover the age of two should reduce theirfat intake to 30 percent or less of theirtotal caloric intake. The current na-tional average is 38 percent. In addi-tion, we should reduce our intake ofsaturated fat to less than 10 percent ofthe total calories consumed. We shouldincrease our intake of polyunsaturatedfat, but to no more than 10 percent ofour total calories. Finally, we shouldreduce our daily cholesterol intake to300 milligrams or less. Figure 6-4 sug-gests actions commanders can take tosupport sound dietary guidelines. Mostof these actions concern dining-facil-ity management.

Concerns for OptimalPhysical Performance

Carbohydrates, in the form of gly -cogen (a complex sugar), are the pri-mary fuel source for muscles duringshort-term, high-intensity activities.Repetitive, vigorous activity can useup most of the carbohydrate stores inthe exercised muscles.

The body uses fat to help provideenergy for extended activities such asa one-hour run. Initially, the chieffuel burned is carbohydrates, ‘but asthe duration increases, the contribu-tion from fat gradually increases.

The intensity of the exercise alsoinfluences whether fats or carbohy-drates are used to provide energy.Very intense activities use more car-bohydrates. Examples include weighttraining and the APFT sit-up andpush-up events.

Eating foods rich in carbohydrateshelps maintain adequate muscle-gly -cogen reserves while sparing aminoacids (critical building-blocks neededfor building proteins). At least 50percent of the calories in the dietshould come from carbohydrates.Individual caloric requirements vary,depending on body size, sex, age, andtraining mission. Foods rich in com-plex carbohydrates (for example, pasta,rice, whole wheat bread, potatoes) arethe best sources of energy for activesoldiers.

Carbohydrates are theprimary fuel source for

muscles during short- term, high-intensity

activities.

6-3

Page 97: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 6-4

6-4

Page 98: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Because foods eaten one to threedays before an activity provide part ofthe fuel for that activity, it is impor-tant to eat foods every day that are richin complex carbohydrates. It is alsoimportant to avoid simple sugars, suchas candy, up to 60 minutes before ex-ercising, because they can lead to lowblood sugar levels during exercise.

Soldiers often fail to drink enoughwater, especially when training in theheat. Water is an essential nutrient thatis critical to optimal physical perform-ance. It plays an important role inmaintaining normal body temperature.The evaporation of sweat helps cool thebody during exercise. As a result, wa-ter lost through sweating must bereplaced or poor performance, andpossibly injury, can result. Sweatconsists primarily of water with smallquantities of minerals like sodium.Cool, plain water is the best drink touse to replace the fluid lost as sweat.Soldiers should drink water before,during, and after exercise to pre-ven t dehydra t ion and he lp en -hance performance. Figure 6-5 showsrecommendations for fluid intake whenexercising.

Sports drinks, which are usuallysimple carbohydrates (sugars) andelectrolytes dissolved in water, arehelpful under certain circumstances.There is evidence that solutions con-taining up to 10 percent carbohydratewill enter the blood fast enough to de-liver additional glucose to the activemuscles. This can improve endurance.

During prolonged periods of exer-cise (1.5+ hours) at intensities over 50percent of heart rate reserve, one canbenefit from periodically drinkingsports drinks with a concentration of 5to 10 percent carbohydrate. Soldierson extended road marches can alsobenefit from drinking these types ofglucose-containing beverages. Duringintense training, these beverages canprovide a source of carbohydrate forworking muscles. On the other hand,drinks that exceed levels of 10 percentcarbohydrate, as do regular soda popsand most fruit juices, can lead to ab-dominal cramps, nausea, and diarrhea.Therefore, these drinks should be usedwith caution during intense endurancetraining and other similar activities.

Many people believe that bodybuilders need large quantities of

Figure 6-5

6-5

Page 99: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

protein to promote better musclegrowth. The primary functions ofprotein are to build and repair bodytissue and to form enzymes. Protein isbelieved to contribute little, if any, tothe total energy requirement of heavy-resistance exercises. The recommendeddietary allowance of protein for adultsis 0.8 grams per kilogram of bodyweight. Most people meet this levelwhen about 15 percent of their dailycaloric intake comes from protein.During periods of intense aerobic train-ing, one’s need for protein might besomewhat higher (for example, 1.0 to1.5 grams per kilogram of body weightper day). Weight lifters, who have ahigh proportion of lean body mass, caneasily meet their protein requirementwith a well-balanced diet which has 15to 20 percent of its calories providedby protein. Recent research suggeststhat weight trainers may need no moreprotein per kilogram of body weightthan average, nonathletic people. MostAmericans routinely consume theselevels of protein, or more. The bodyconverts protein consumed in excess

of caloric needs to fat and stores it inthe body.

Nutrition in the Field

Soldiers in the field must eat enoughfood to provide them with the energythey need. They must also drink plentyof water or other non-alcoholic bever-ages. The “meal, ready to eat” (MRE)supplies the needed amount of carbo-hydrates, protein, fat, vitamins, andminerals. It is a nutritionally adequateration when all of its components areeaten and adequate amounts of waterare consumed. Because the foods areenriched and fortified with vitaminsand minerals, each component is amajor source of nutrients. Soldiersmust eat all the components in order toget the daily military recommendeddietary allowances (MRDA) and havean adequate diet in the field. Soldierswho are in weight control programs orwho are trying to lose weight can eatpart of each MRE item, as recom-mended by dietitians.

6-6

Page 100: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

This chapter gives commanders andtrainers guidance in designing andusing exercise circuits. It describescalisthenic exercises for developingstrength, endurance, coordination, andflexibility. It also describes grass drillsand guerilla exercises which are closelyrelated to soldiering skills and shouldbe regularly included in the unit’sphysical fitness program.

Circuit training is a term associatedwith specific training routines. Com-manders with a good understanding ofthe principles of circuit training mayapply them to a wide variety of train-ing situations and environments.

Circuits

A circuit is a group of

stations or areas where

specific tasks or

exercises are performed.

A circuit is a group of stations orareas where specific tasks or exercisesare performed. The task or exerciseselected for each station and the ar-rangement of the stations is deter-mined by the objective of the circuit.

Circuits are designed to provide ex-ercise to groups of soldiers at intensi-ties which suit each person’s fitnesslevel. Circuits can promote fitness ina broad range of physical and motorfitness areas. These include CR endur-ance, muscular endurance, strength,flexibility, and speed. Circuits can alsobe designed to concentrate on sportsskills, soldiers’ common tasks, or anycombination of these. In addition,circuits can be organized to exercise allthe fitness components in a short pe-riod of time. A little imagination canmake circuit training an excellentaddition to a unit’s total physical fit-ness program. At the same time, it canprovide both fun and a challenge tosoldiers’ physical and mental abilities.Almost any area can be used, and anynumber of soldiers can exercise forvarious lengths of time.

TYPES OF CIRCUITS

The two basic types of circuits arethe free circuit and the fixed circuit.Each has distinct advantages.

Free Circuit

In a free circuit, there is no set timefor staying at each station, and nosignal is given to move from onestation to the next. Soldiers work attheir own pace, doing a fixed numberof repetitions at each station. Progressis measured by the time needed tocomplete a circuit. Because soldiersmay do incomplete or fewer repeti-tions than called for to reduce thistime, the quality and number of therepetitions done should be monitored.Aside from this, the free circuit re-quires little supervision.

Fixed Circuit

In a fixed circuit, a specific lengthof time is set for each station. Thetime is monitored with a stopwatch,and soldiers rotate through the stationson command.There are three basic ways to increasethe intensity or difficulty of a fixedcircuit: • Keep the time for completion the same, but increase the number of repetitions. • Increase the time per station along with the number of repetitions. • Increase the number of times sol- diers go through the circui t .

VARIABLES IN CIRCUIT TRAINING

Several variables in circuit trainingmust be considered. These include thetime, number of stations, number of

7-1

Page 101: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

time, number of stations, number ofsoldiers, number of times the circuit iscompleted, and sequence of stations.These are discussed below.

Time

One of the first things to consider ishow long it should take to complete thecircuit. When a fixed circuit is run, thetime at each station should always bethe same to avoid confusion and helpmaintain control. Consider also thetime it takes to move from one stationto the next. Further, allow from fiveto seven minutes both before and afterrunning a circuit for warming up andcooling down, respectively.

Number of Stations

The objective of the circuit andtime and equipment available stronglyinfluence the number of stations. Acircuit geared for a limited objective(for example, developing lower-bodystrength) needs as few as six to eightstations. On the other hand, circuits todevelop both strength and CR fitnessmay have as many as 20 stations.

Number of Soldiers

If there are 10 stations and 40soldiers to be trained, the soldiersshould be divided into 10 groups offour each. Each station must then beequipped to handle four soldiers. Forexample, in this instance a rope jump-ing station must have at least four jumpropes. It is vital in a free circuit thatno soldier stand around waiting forequipment. Having enough equipmentreduces bottlenecks, slowdowns, andpoor results.

Number of Times a Circuit isCompleted

To achieve the desired training effect,soldiers may have to repeat the same

circuit several times. For example, acircuit may have ten stations. Soldiersmay run through the circuit threetimes, exercising for 30 seconds ateach station, and taking 15 seconds tomove between stations. The exercisetime at each station may be reduced to20 seconds the second and third timethrough. The whole workout takes lessthan 45 minutes including warm-upand cool-down. As soldiers becomebetter conditioned, exercise periodsmay be increased to 30 seconds orlonger for all three rotations. Anotheroption is to have four rotations of thecircuit.

Sequence of Stations

Stations should be arranged in a se-quence that allows soldiers some re-covery time after exercising at strenu-ous stations. Difficult exercises can bealternated with less difficult ones.After the warm-up, soldiers can starta circuit at any station and still achievethe objective by completing the fullcircuit.

DESIGNING A CIRCUIT

The designer of a circuit mustconsider many factors. The six stepsbelow cover the most important

pects of circuit development.

Determine Objectives

The designer must considerspecific parts of the body and

as-

thethe

components of fitness on which sol-diers need to concentrate. For ex-ample, increasing muscular strengthmay be the primary objective, whilemuscular endurance work may besecondary. On the other hand, im-proving cardiorespiratory endurancemay be the top priority. The designer

The designer must consider the specific parts of the body and the components of fitness on which soldiers need to concentrate.

must first identify the training objec-tive in order to choose the appropriateexercises.

7-2

Page 102: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Select the Activities

The circuit designer should list allthe exercises or activities that can helpmeet the objectives. Then he shouldlook at each item on the list and ask thefollowing questions:● Will equipment be needed? Is it

available?● Will supervision be needed? Is it

available?● Are there safety factors to consider?

Answering these questions helps thedesigner decide which exercises to use.He can choose from the exercises,calisthenics, conditioning drills, grassdrills, and guerrilla drills described inthis chapter. However, he should notlimit the circuit to only these activities.Imagination and field expediency areimportant elements in developing cir-cuits that hold the interest of soldiers.(See Figures 7-1 through 7-3.)

Arrange the Stations

A circuit usually has 8 to 12 stations,but it may have as many as 20. Afterdeciding how many stations to include,the designer must decide how to ar-range them. For example, in a circuitfor strength training, the same musclegroup should not be exercised at con-secutive stations.

One approach is to alternate “push-ing” exercises with “pulling” exerciseswhich involve movement at the samejoint(s). For example, in a strengthtraining circuit, exercisers may followthe pushing motion of a bench presswith the pulling motion of the seatedrow. This could be followed by thepushing motion of the overhead presswhich could be followed by the pullingmotion of the lat pull-down. Anotherapproach might be to alternate be-tween upper and lower body exercises.

By not exercising the same musclegroup twice in a row, each muscle has

a chance to recover before it is used inanother exercise. If some exercises areharder than others, soldiers can alter-nate hard exercises with easier ones.The choice of exercises depends on theobjectives of the circuit.

Select the Training Sites

Circuits may be conducted out-doors or indoors. If the designer wantsto include running or jogging a certaindistance between stations, he may dothis in several ways. In the gymna-sium, soldiers may run five laps or for20 to 40 seconds between stations.Outdoors, they may run laps or runbetween spread-out stations if space isavailable. However, spreading thestations too far apart may cause prob-lems with control and supervision.

Prepare a Sketch

The designer should draw a simplesketch that shows the location of eachstation in the training area. The sketchshould include the activity and lengthof time at each station, the number ofstations, and all other useful informa-tion.

Lay Out the Stations

The final step is to lay out thestations which should be numberedand clearly marked by signs or cards.In some cases, instructions for thestations are written on the signs. Thenecessary equipment is placed at eachstation.

The choice of exercises

for circuit training

depends on the objectives

of the circuit.

Sample Conditioning Circuits

Figures 7-1, 7-2, and 7-3 showdifferent types of conditioning cir-cuits. Soldiers should work at eachstation 45 seconds and have 15 secondsto rotate to the next station.

7-3

Page 103: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 7-1

7-4

Page 104: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 7-2

7-5

Page 105: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 7-3

7-6

Page 106: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Calisthenics

Calisthenics can be

used to help develop

coordination. CR and

muscular encurance,

flexibility, and strength.

Calisthenics can be used to exercisemost of the major muscle groups of thebody. They can help develop coordi-nation, CR and muscular endurance,flexibility, and strength. Poorly-coor-dinated soldiers, however, will derivethe greatest benefit from many of theseexercises

Although calisthenics have somevalue when included in a CR circuit orwhen exercising to music, for theaverage soldier, calisthenics such as thebend and reach, squat bender, lunger,knee bender, and side-straddle hop canbest be used in the warm-up and cool-down periods. Exercises such as thepush-up, sit-up, parallel bar dip, andchin-up/pull-up, on the other hand,can effectively be used in the condi-tioning period to develop muscular en-durance or muscular strength.

Please note that exercises such as thebend and reach, lunger, and leg spreader,which were once deleted from FM 21-20 because of their potential risk to theexerciser, have been modified and re-introduced in this edition. All modi-fications should be strictly adhered to.

Few exercises are inherently unsafe.Nonetheless, some people, because ofpredisposing conditions or injuries,may find certain exercises less safethan others. Leaders must considereach of their soldier’s physical limita-tions and use good judgment beforeletting a soldier perform these exer-cises. However, for the average soldierwho is of sound body, following thedirections written below will producesatisfactory results with a minimumrisk of injury.

Finally, some of the calisthenicslisted below may be done in cadence.These calisthenics are noted, and di-rections are provided below with re-spect to the actions and cadence. Whendoing exercises at a moderate cadence,use 80 counts per minute. With a slow

cadence, use 50 counts per minuteunless otherwise directed.

SAFETY FACTORSWhile injury is always possible in

any vigorous physical activity, fewcalisthenic exercises are really unsafeor dangerous. The keys to avoidinginjury while gaining training benefitsare using correct form and intensity.Also, soldiers with low fitness levels,such as trainees, shouId not do the ad-vanced exercises highly fit soldiers cando. For example, with the lower backproperly supported, flutter kicks arean excellent way to condition the hipflexor muscles. However, without sup-port, the possibility of straining thelower back increases. It is not sensibleto have recruits do multiple sets offlutter kicks because they probably arenot conditioned for them. On the otherhand, a conditioned Ranger companymay use multiple sets of flutter’ kickswith good results.

The key to doing calisthenic exer-cises safely is to use common sense.Also, ballistic (that is, quick-moving)exercises that combine rotation andbending of the spine increase the riskof back injury and should be avoided.This is especially true if someone hashad a previous injury to the back. Ifthis type of action is performed, slowstretching exercises, not conditioningdrills done to cadence, should be used.

Some soldiers complain of shoulderproblems resulting from rope climb-ing, horizontal ladder, wheelbarrow,and crab-walk exercises. These exer-cises are beneficial when the soldier isfit and he does them in a regular,progressive manner. However, a cer-tain level of muscular strength isneeded to do them safely. Therefore,soldiers should progressively train tobuild up to these exercises. Using suchexercises for unconditioned soldiersincreases the risk of injury and acci-dent.

7-7

Page 107: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Progression and Recovery

Other important principles for avoid-ing injury are progression and recov-ery. Programs that try to do too muchtoo soon invite problems. The dayafter a “hard” training day, if soldiersare working the same muscle groupsand/or fitness components, they shouldwork them at a reduced intensity tominimize stress and permit recovery.

The best technique is to train alter-nate muscle groups and/or fitnesscomponents on different days. Forexample, if the Monday-Wednesday-Friday (M-W-F) training objective isCR fitness, soldiers can do abilitygroup running at THR with some lightcalisthenics and stretching. If theTuesday-Thursday (T-Th) objectiveis muscular endurance and strength,soldiers can benefit from doing part-ner-resisted exercises followed by aslow run. To ensure balance andregularity in the program, the nextweek should have muscle enduranceand strength development on M-W-Fand training for CR endurance on T-Th. Such a program has variety,develops all the fitness components,and follows the seven principles ofexercise while, at the same time, itminimizes injuries caused by overuse.

Leaders should plan PT sessions toget a positive training effect, not toconduct “gut checks.” They shouldknow how to correctly do all the exer-cises in their program and teach theirsoldiers to train using good form tohelp avoid injuries.

Key Points for Safety

Doing safe exercises correctly im-proves a soldier’s fitness with a mini-mum risk of injury. The following are key points for en-suring safety during stretching andcalisthenic exercises: • Stretch slowly and without pain and unnatural stress to a joint. Use static (slow and sustained) stretch- ing for warming up, cooling down, ballistic (bouncy or jerky) stretch- ing movements. • Do not allow the angle formed by the upper and lower legs to become less than 90 degrees when the legs are bearing weight. • A combination of spinal rotation and bending should generally be avoided. However, if done, use only slow, controlled movements with little or no extra weight.

Leaders must be aware of the vari-ety of methods they may use to attaintheir physical training goals. Theunit’s Master Fitness Trainer is schooledto provide safe, effective training meth-ods and answer questions about train-ing techniques.

CALISTHENIC EXERCISES

The following are some commoncalisthenic exercises.

7-8

Page 108: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-9

Page 109: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-10

Page 110: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-11

Page 111: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-12

Page 112: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-13

Page 113: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-14

Page 114: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-15

Page 115: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

7-16

Page 116: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

CONDITIONING DRILLS

Some large units prefer to use sets of sets, soldiers do as many repetitions ofcalisthenic exercises as part of their PT an exercise as possible in the allowed

Conditioning drills are intended to supplement muscular strength and endurance training sessions.

sessions. Figure 7-4 shows three cal-isthenic conditioning drills for boththe poorly conditioned and physicallyfit soldiers. The drills are designed tobe done progressively and are intendedto supplement muscular strength andendurance training sessions.

Leaders can mix the exercises toprovide greater intensity, based on thefitness level of the soldiers being trained.However, they should choose andsequence them to alternate the musclegroups being worked. Soldiers shoulddo each exercise progressively from 15to 40 or more repetitions (20 to 60 sec-onds for timed sets) based on theirlevel of conditioning. They may alsodo each exercise in cadence unlesstimed sets are specified. For timed

time. Using timed sets, both the well-conditioned and less-fit soldiers canwork themselves to their limits.

The following conditioning drills(Figure 7-4) are arranged according tothe phase of training.

Grass DrillsGrass drills are exercise movements

that feature rapid changes in bodyposition. These are vigorous drillswhich, when properly done, exerciseall the major muscle groups. Soldiersshould respond to commands as fast aspossible and do all movements at topspeed. They continue to do multiplerepetitions of each exercise until thenext command is given. No cadence iscounted.

7-17

Page 117: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 7-4

Performing grass drills can improve does all the activities so that he canCR endurance, help develop muscular gauge the intensity of the session. Theendurance and strength, and speed up commands for grass drills are given inreaction time. Since these drills are rapid succession without the usualextremely strenuous, they should last preparatory commands. To preventfor short periods (30 to 45 seconds per confusion, commands are given sharply Grass drills are exerciseexercise). The two drills described to distinguish them from comments or movements that featurehere each have four exercises. Leaders words of encouragement. rapid changes incan develop additional drills locally. As soon as the soldiers are familiar body position.

The soldiers should do a warm-up with the drill, they do all the exercisesbefore performing the drills and do a as vigorously and rapidly as possible,cool-down afterward. The instructor and they do each exercise until the

7-18

Page 118: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

next command is given. Anything lessthan a top-speed performance de-creases the effectiveness of the drills.

Once the drills start, soldiers do notSoldiers should do a have to resume the position of atten-

warm--up before tion. The instructor uses the commandperforming grass “Up” to halt the drill for instructions or

drills and do a cool- rest. At this command, soldiers assumedown afterward. a relaxed, standing position.

Grass drills can be done in a shorttime. For example, they may be usedwhen only a few minutes are availablefor exercise or when combined withanother activity. Sometimes, if time islimited, they are a good substitute forrunning.

Most movements are done in place.The extended-rectangular formation isbest for a platoon- or company-sizedunit. The circle formation is moresuitable for squad- or section-sizedgroups.

When soldiers are starting an exer-cise program, a 10- to 15-minuteworkout may be appropriate. Progres-sion is made by a gradual increase inthe time devoted to the drills. As thefitness of the soldiers improves, thetimes should be gradually lengthenedto 20 minutes. The second drill isharder than the first. Therefore, assoldiers progress in the first drill, theinstructor should introduce the second.If he sees that the drill needs to belonger, he can repeat the exercises orcombine the two drills.

STARTING POSITIONS

After the warm-up, bring the sol-diers to a position of ATTENTION.

Progression with grass The drills begin with the commanddrills is made by a GO. Other basic commands are FRONT,

gradual increase in BACK, and STOP. (See Figure 7-5 forthe time devoted to the positions and actions associated

the drills. with these commands. )● ATTENTION: The position of at

tention is described in FM 22-5,Drill and Ceremonies.

GO This involves running in placeat top speed on the balls of the feet.The soldier raises his knees high,pumps his arms, and bends forwardslightly at the waist.FRONT The soldier lies pronewith elbows bent and palms di-rectly under the shoulders as in thedown position of the push up. Thelegs are straight and together withthe head toward the instructor.BACK: The soldier lies flat on hisback with his arms extended alonghis sides and his palms facing downward. His legs are straight and together; his feet face the instructor.STOP The soldier assumes the stanceof a football lineman with feetspread and staggered. His left armis across his left thigh; his right armis straight. His knuckles are on theground; his head is up, and his backis roughly parallel to the ground.To assume the FRONT or BACK

position from the standing GO orSTOP positions, the soldier changespositions vigorously and rapidly. (SeeFigure 7-5.)

To change from the FRONT to theBACK position (Figure 7-5), the sol-dier does the following:●

Takes several short steps to theright or left.Lifts his arm on the side towardwhich his feet move.Thrusts his legs vigorously to thefront.To change from the BACK to the

FRONT position, the soldier sits upquickly. He places both hands on theground to the right or left of his legs.He takes several short steps to the rearon the side opposite his hands. Whenhis feet are opposite his hands, hethrusts his legs vigorously to the rearand lowers his body to the ground.(See Figure 7-5.)

7-19

Page 119: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 7-5

7-20

Page 120: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

GRASS DRILL ONE

Exercises for grass drill one aredescribed below and shown inFigure 7-6.

Bouncing Ball

From the FRONT position, push upand support the body on the hands(shoulder-width apart) and feet. Keepthe back and legs generally in line andthe knees straight. Bounce up anddown in a series of short, simultaneous,upward springs from the hands, hips,and feet.

Supine Bicycle

From the BACK position, flex thehips and knees. Place the palmsdirectly on top of the head, and inter-lace the fingers. Bring the knee of oneleg upward toward the chest. At thesame time, curl the trunk and headupward while touching the oppositeelbow to the elevated knee. Repeatwith the other leg and elbow. Continuethese movements as opposite legs andarms take turns.

Knee Bender

From the position of ATTENTION,do half-knee bends with the feet inline and the hands at the sides. Makesure the knees do not bend to an angleless than 90 degrees.

Roll Left and Right

From the FRONT position, con-tinue to roll in the direction com-manded until another command isgiven. Then, return to the FRONTposition.

GRASS DRILL TWO

Exercises for grass drill two aredescribed below and shown in Figure7-6.

The Swimmer

From the FRONT position, extendthe arms forward. Move the right armand left leg up and down; then, movethe left arm and right leg up and down.Continue in an alternating manner.

Bounce and Clap Hands

The procedure is almost the same asfor the bouncing ball in grass drill one.However, while in the air, clap thehands. This action requires a morevigorous bounce or spring. The push-up may be substituted for this exercise.

Leg Spreader

From the BACK position, raise thelegs until the heels are no higher thansix inches off the ground. Spread thelegs apart as far as possible, then putthem back together. Keep the head offthe ground. Throughout, place thehands under the upper part of the but-tocks, and slightly bend the knees toease pressure on the lower back. Openand close the legs as fast as possible.The curl-up may be substituted forthis exercise.

Forward Roll

From the STOP position, place bothhands on the ground, tuck the head,and roll forward. Keep the headtucked while rolling.

Stationary Run

From the position of ATTENTION,start running in place at the GOcommand by lifting the left foot first.Follow the instructor as he counts tworepetitions of cadence. For example,“One, two, three, four; one, two, three,four.” The instructor then gives infor-mal commands such as the following:“Follow me,” “Run on the toes and ballsof your feet,” “Speed it up,” “Increaseto a sprint, raise your knees high, lean

7-21

Page 121: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

forward at your waist, and pump your the left foot strikes the ground: “One,arms vigorously,” and “Slow it down.” two, three, four, one, two, three,

To halt the exercise, the instructor HALT.”counts two repetitions of cadence as

Figure 7-6

7-22

Page 122: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Guerilla Exercises

Guerrilla exercises, which can beused to improve agility, CR endur-ance, muscular endurance, and to somedegree muscular strength, combineindividual and partner exercises. Thesedrills require soldiers to change theirpositions quickly and do various basicskills while moving forward. Figures7-7 and 7-8 show these exercises.

The instructor decides the durationSoldiers progress with for each exercise by observing itsguerilla exercises by effect on the soldiers. Depending on

shortening the quick- how vigorously it is done, each exer-time marching periods cise should be continued for 20 to 40between exercises and seconds.

by doing all the The group moves in circle forma-exercises a second time. tion while doing the exercises. If the

platoon exceeds 30 soldiers, concen-tric circles may be used. A warm-up

instructor steps into the center andissues commands.

EXERCISE AND PROGRESSION

Soldiers progress by shortening thequick-time marching periods betweenexercises and by doing all exercises asecond time. This produces an over-load that improves fitness.

Many soldiers have not had a chanceto do the simple skills involved inguerrilla exercises. However, they cando these exercises easily and quickly inalmost any situation.

The preparatory command is alwaysthe name of the exercise, and thecommand of execution is always “March.”The command “Quick time, march”ends each exercise.

For the double guerrilla exercises (inactivity should precede these exer- circle formation) involving two sol-cises, and a cool-down should follow diers, the commands for pairing are asthem. After the circle is formed, the follows:

Figure 7-7

7-23

Page 123: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

● “Platoon halt.”● “From (soldier is designated), by

twos, count off.” (For example: 1-2, 1-2, 1-2.)

● “Even numbers, move up behindodd numbers.” (Pairs are adjustedaccording to height and weight.)

● “You are now paired up for doubleguerrillas.” The command “Change”is given to change the soldiers’positions.After the exercises are completed,

the instructor halts the soldiers andpositions the base soldier or platoonguide by commanding, “Base man (orplatoon guide), post.” He then com-mands “Fall out and fall in on the baseman (or platoon guide).”

EXERCISE DESCRIPTIONS

Brief explanations of guerrilla ex-ercises follow.

All-Fours Run

Face downward, supporting the bodyon the hands and feet. Advanceforward as fast as possible by movingthe arms and legs forward in a coordi-nated way.

Bottoms-Up Walk

Take the front-leaning rest posi-tion, and move the feet toward thehands in short steps while keeping theknees locked. When the feet are asclose to the hands as possible, walkforward on the hands to the front-leaning-rest position.

Crab Walk

Assume a sitting position with thehips off the ground and hands and feetsupporting the body’s weight. Walkforward, feet first.

The Engine

Stand with the arms straight and infront of the body. The arms should beparallel to the ground with the palmsfacing downward. While walkingforward, bring the left knee upward tothe left elbow. Return to the startposition. Continuing to walk forward,touch the right knee to the right elbow.Recover to the start position. Be sureto keep the arms parallel to the groundthroughout the entire exercise.

Double Time

Do a double-time run while main-taining the circle formation.

Broad Jump

Jump forward on both feet in aseries of broad jumps. Swing the armsvigorously to help with the jumps.

Straddle Run

Run forward, leaping to the rightwith the left foot and to the left withthe right foot.

Hobble Hopping

Hold one foot behind the back withthe opposite hand and hop forward.On the command “Change,” grasp theopposite foot with the opposite handand hop forward.

Two-Man Carry

For two-man carries, soldiers aredesignated as number one (odd-num-bered) and number two (even-num-bered). A number-one and number-two soldier work as partners.

7-24

Page 124: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Fireman’s Carry

Two soldiers do the carry. On com-mand, number-two soldier bends atthe waist, with feet apart in a balancedstance. Number-one soldier movestoward his partner. He places himselfby his partner’s left shoulder and bendshimself over his partner’s shouldersand back. When in position, number-two soldier, with his left hand, reachesbetween his partner’s legs and graspshis left wrist. On command, they moveforward until the command for change-over. They then change positions. Thefireman’s carry can also be done fromthe other side.

Single-Shoulder Carry

Two soldiers do the carry. On com-mand, number-two soldier bends at thewaist with feet apart in a balancedstance. At the same time, number-onesoldier moves toward his partner. Heplaces his abdominal area onto his part-ner’s right or left shoulder and leansover. Number-two soldier puts hisarms around the back of his partner’sknees and stands up. On command,they move forward until the commandfor changeover. They then changepositions.

Cross Carry

On command, number-two soldierbends over at the waist. He twists

slightly to the left with feet spreadapart in a balanced position. At thesame time, number-one soldier movestoward his partner’s left side and leansover his partner’s back. Number twosoldier, with his left arm, reachesaround his partner’s legs. At the sametime, he reaches around his partner’sback with his right arm, being carefulnot to grab his partner’s neck or head.He then stands up straight, holding hispartner on his back. On command,they move forward until the commandfor changeover. They then changepositions.

Saddle-Back (Piggyback) Carry

On command, number-two soldierbends at the waist and knees with hishand on his knees and his head up. Toassume the piggyback position, num-ber-one soldier moves behind his part-ner, places his hands on his partner’sshoulders, and climbs carefully ontohis partner’s hips. As number-onesoldier climbs on, number-two soldiergrasps his partner’s legs to help supporthim. Number-one soldier places hisarms over his partner’s shoulders andcrosses his hands over his partner’supper chest. They move forward untilthe command for changeover is given.They then change positions.

7-25

Page 125: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 7-8

7-26

Page 126: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

This chapter describes obstaclecourses as well as rifle drills, log drills,and aquatic exercises. These are notdesigned to develop specific compo-nents of physical fitness. Commandersshould use them to add variety to theirPT programs and to help soldiers de-velop motor fitness including speed,agility, coordination, and related skillsand abilities. Many of these activitiesalso give soldiers the chance to planstrategy, make split-second decisions,learn teamwork, and demonstrate lead-ership.

When planning and building such fa-cilities, designers should, at a mini-mum, consider the following guid-ance: ● Secure approval from the local in- s tal lat ion 's commander. ● Prepare a safety and health-risk as- sessment to support construction o f e a c h o b s t a c l e .● Coordinate approval for each ob- stacle with the local or supporting safety office. Keep a copy of the approval in the permanent records.● Monitor and analyze all injuries.● Inspect all existing safety precau- tions on-site to verify their effec- t i v e n e s s . ● Review each obstacle to determine the need for renewing its approval.

Obstacle Courses

There are two types of

obstacle courses-

conditioning and

confidence.

Physical performance and success incombat may depend on a soldier’sability to perform skills like thoserequired on the obstacle course. Forthis reason, and because they helpdevelop and test basic motor skills,obstacle courses are valuable for physi-cal training.

There are two types of obstaclecourses--conditioning and confidence.The conditioning course has low ob-stacles that must be negotiated quickly.Running the course can be a test of thesoldier’s basic motor skills and physicalcondition. After soldiers receive in-struction and practice the skills, theyrun the course against time.

A confidence course has higher,more difficult obstacles than a condi-tioning course. It gives soldiers confi-dence in their mental and physicalabilities and cultivates their spirit ofdaring. Soldiers are encouraged, butnot forced, to go through it. Unlikeconditioning courses, confidence coursesare not run against time.

NONSTANDARD COURSES ANDOBSTACLES

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Instructors must always be alert tosafety. They must take every precau-tion to minimize injuries as soldiers gothrough obstacle courses. Soldiersmust do warm-up exercises beforethey begin. This prepares them for thephysically demanding tasks ahead andhelps minimize the chance of injury.A cool-down after the obstacle courseis also necessary, as it helps the bodyrecover from strenuous exercise.

Commanders should use ingenuityin building courses, making good useof streams, hills, trees, rocks, andother natural obstacles. They mustinspect courses for badly built ob-stacles, protruding nails, rotten logs,unsafe landing pits, and other safetyhazards.

There are steps which designers cantake to reduce injuries. For example,at the approach to each obstacle, theyshould post an instruction board orsign with text and pictures showinghow to negotiate it. Landing pits forjumps or vaults, and areas under oraround obstacles where soldiers mayfall from a height, should be filledwith loose sand or sawdust, All

Commanders may build obstaclesand courses that are nonstandard (thatis, not covered in this manual) in orderto create training situations based ont h e i r u n i t ' s M E T L .

8-1

Page 127: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

landing areas should be raked andrefilled before each use. Puddles ofwater under obstacles can cause a falsesense of security. These could result inimproper landing techniques and seri-ous injuries. Leaders should postponetraining on obstacle courses when wetweather makes them slippery.

Units should prepare their soldiersto negotiate obstacle courses by doingconditioning exercises beforehand. Sol-diers should attain an adequate level ofconditioning before they run the con-fidence course, Soldiers who have notpracticed the basic skills or run theconditioning course should not be al-lowed to use the confidence course.

Instructors must explain and dem-onstrate the correct ways to negotiateall obstacles before allowing soldiers torun them. Assistant instructors shouldsupervise the negotiation of higher,more dangerous obstacles. The em-phasis is on avoiding injury. Soldiersshould practice each obstacle until theyare able to negotiate it. Before they runthe course against time, they shouldmake several slow runs while the in-structor watches and makes neededcorrections. Soldiers should never beallowed to run the course against timeuntil they have practiced on all theobstacles.

CONDITIONING OBSTACLE COURSES

If possible, an obstacle course shouldbe shaped like a horseshoe or figureeight so that the finish is close to thestart. Also, signs should be placed toshow the route.

A course usually ranges from 300 to450 yards and has 15 to 25 obstaclesthat are 20 to 30 yards apart. Theobstacles are arranged so that thosewhich exercise the same groups ofmuscles are separated from one an-other.

The obstacles must be solidly built.Peeled logs that are six to eight inches

wide are ideal for most of them. Sharppoints and corners should be elimi-nated, and landing pits for jumps orvaults must be filled with sand or saw-dust. Courses should be built andmarked so that soldiers cannot sidestepobstacles or detour around them.Sometimes, however, courses can pro-vide alternate obstacles that vary indifficulty.

Each course should be wide enoughfor six to eight soldiers to use at thesame time, thus encouraging competi-tion. The lanes for the first fewobstacles should be wider and theobstacles easier than those that follow.In this way, congestion is avoided andsoldiers can spread out on the course.To minimize the possibility of fallsand injuries due to fatigue, the lasttwo or three obstacles should not betoo difficult or involve high climbing.

Trainers must always be aware thatfalls from the high obstacles couldcause serious injury. Soldiers must bein proper physical condition, closely Instructors must explainsupervised, and adequately instructed. and demonstrate the

The best way for the timer to time correct ways tothe runners is to stand at the finish and negotiate all obstaclescall out the minutes and seconds as before allowing soldierseach soldier finishes. If several watches to run them.are available, each wave of soldiers istimed separately. If only one watch isavailable, the waves are started atregular intervals such as every 30seconds. If a soldier fails to negotiatean obstacle, a previously determinedpenalty is imposed.

When the course is run against time,stopwatches, pens, and a unit rosterare needed. Soldiers may run thecourse with or without individualequipment.

Obstacles for Jumping

These obstacles are ditches to clearwith one leap, trenches to jump into,heights to jump from, or hurdles. (SeeFigure 8-l.)

8-2

Page 128: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Obstacles for Dodging between the posts are narrow so thatsoldiers must pick their way carefully

These obstacles are usually mazes of through and around them. Lane guidesposts set in the ground at irregular are built to guide soldiers in dodgingintervals. (See Figure 8-2.) The spaces and changing direction.

Figure 8-1

Figure 8-2

8 - 3

Page 129: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Obstacles for Vertical Climbing and Obstacles for Horizontal TraversingSurmounting

Horizontal obstacles may be ropes,These obstacles are shown at Figure pipes, or beams. (See Figure 8-4.)

8-3 and include the following:● Climbing ropes that are 1 1/2 inches

wide and either straight or knotted.● Cargo nets.● Walls 7 or 8 feet high.● Vertical poles 15 feet high and 6 to

8 inches wide.

Figure 8-3

Figure 8-4

8 - 4

Page 130: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Obstacles for Crawling Obstacles for Vaulting

These obstacles may be built of These obstacles should be 3 tolarge pipe sections, low rails, or wire. 3 1/2 feet high. Examples are fences(See Figure 8-5.) and low walls. (See Figure 8-6.)

Figure 8-5

Figure 8-6

8-5

Page 131: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Obstacles for Balancing

Beams, logs, and planks may beused. These may span water obstaclesand dry ditches, or they may be raisedoff the ground to simulate natural de-pressions. (See Figure 8-7.)

CONFIDENCE OBSTACLE COURSES

Confidence obstacle courses mustbe built in accordance with Folio No.1, “Training Facilities,” Corps of En-gineers Drawing Number 28-13-95.You can obtain this publication fromthe Directorate of Facilities Engineer-ing at most Army installations.

Confidence courses can developconfidence and strength by using ob-stacles that train and test balance andmuscular strength. Soldiers do not ne-gotiate these obstacles at high speed oragainst time. The obstacles vary fromfairly easy to difficult, and some arehigh. For these, safety nets are pro-vided. Soldiers progress through thecourse without individual equipment.Only one soldier at a time negotiates an

Figure 8-7

obstacle unless it is designed for use bymore than one.

Confidence courses should accom-modate four platoons, one at eachgroup of six obstacles. Each platoonbegins at a different starting point. Inthe example below, colors are used togroup the obstacles. Any similar methodmay be used to spread a group over thecourse. Soldiers are separated intogroups of 8 to 12 at each obstacle. Atthe starting signal, they proceed throughthe course.

Soldiers may skip any obstacle theyare unwilling to try. Instructors shouldencourage fearful soldiers to try theeasier obstacles first. Gradually, astheir confidence improves, they can

8-6

Page 132: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

take their places in the normal rotation.Soldiers proceed from one obstacle tothe next until time is called. They thenassemble and move to the next group ofobstacles.

Rules for the Course

Supervisors should encourage, butnot force, soldiers to try every obstacle.Soldiers who have not run the coursebefore should receive a brief orienta-tion at each obstacle, including an ex-planation and demonstration of thebest way to negotiate it. Instructorsshould help those who have problems.Trainers and soldiers should not try tomake obstacles more difficult by shak-ing ropes, rolling logs, and so forth.Close supervision and common sensemust be constantly used to enhancesafety and prevent injuries.

Soldiers need not conform to anyone method of negotiating obstacles,but there is a uniformity in the generalapproach. Recommended ways to ne-

Red Group

This group contains the first six ob-stacles. These are described below andnumbered 1 through 6 in Figure 8-8.Belly Buster. Soldiers vault, jump, orclimb over the log. They must bewarned that it is not stationary. There-fore, they should not roll or rock thelog while others are negotiating it.Reverse Climb. Soldiers climb the re-verse incline and go down the otherside to the ground.Weaver. Soldiers move from one endof the obstacle to the other by weav-ing their bodies under one bar andover the next.Hip-Hip. Soldiers step over each bar;they either alternate legs or use thesame lead leg each time.Balancing Logs. Soldiers step up on alog and walk or run along it whilekeeping their balance.Island Hopper. Soldiers jump fromone log to another until the obstacle is

gotiate obstacles are described below. negotiated.

Figure 8-8

8-7

Page 133: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

White Group

This group contains the second sixobstacles. These are described belowand numbered 7 through 12 in Figure8-9.Tough Nut. Soldiers step over each Xin the lane.Inverted Rope Descent. Soldiers climbthe tower, grasp the rope firmly, andswing their legs upward. They hold therope with their legs to distribute theweight between their legs and arms.Braking the slide with their feet andlegs, they proceed down the rope. Sol-diers must be warned that they may getrope burns on their hands. This ob-stacle can be dangerous when the ropeis slippery. Soldiers leave the rope ata clearly marked point of release.Only one soldier at a time is allowed onthe rope. Soldiers should not shake orbounce the ropes. This obstacle re-quires two instructors--one on theplatform and the other at the base.Low Belly-Over. Soldiers mount thelow log and jump onto the high log.

They grasp over the top of the log withboth arms, keeping the belly area incontact with it. They swing their legsover the log and lower themselves tothe ground.Belly Crawl. Soldiers move forwardunder the wire on their bellies to theend of the obstacle. To reduce the ten-dency to push the crawling surface, itis filled with sand or sawdust to the farend of the obstacle. The direction ofnegotiating the crawl is reversed fromtime to time.Easy Balancer. Soldiers walk up oneinclined log and down the one on theother side to the ground.Tarzan. Soldiers mount the lowest log,walk the length of it, then each higherlog until they reach the horizontal lad-der. They grasp two rungs of theladder and swing themselves into theair. They negotiate the length of theladder by releasing one hand at a timeand swinging forward, grasping a moredistant rung each time.

Figure 8-9

8-8

Page 134: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Blue Group

This group contains the third sixobstacles. These are described belowand numbered 13 through 18 in Figure8-10.High Step-over. Soldiers step overeach log while alternating their leadfoot or using the same one.Swinger. Soldiers climb over the swinglog to the ground on the opposite side.Low Wire. Soldiers move under thewire on their backs while raising thewire with their hands to clear theirbodies. To reduce the tendency to pushthe crawling surface, it is filled with

obstacle. The direction of negotiatingthe obstacle is alternated.Swing, Stop, and Jump. Soldiers gainmomentum with a short run, grasp therope, and swing their bodies forwardto the top of the wall. They release therope while standing on the wall andjump to the ground.Six Vaults. Soldiers vault over the logsusing one or both hands.Wall Hanger. Soldiers walk up thewall using the rope. From the top ofthe wall, they grasp the bar and gohand-over-hand to the rope on the op-posite end. They use the rope to de-

sand or sawdust to the far end of the scend,

Figure 8-10

8-9

Page 135: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Black Group

This group contains the last six ob-stacles. These are described below andnumbered 19 through 24 in Figure 8-11.Inclining Wall. Soldiers approach theunderside of the wall, jump up andgrasp the top, and pull themselves upand over. They slide or jump down theincline to the ground.Skyscraper. Soldiers jump or climb tothe first floor and either climb thecorner posts or help one another to thehigher floors. They descend to theground individually or help one an-other down. The top level or roof isoff limits, and the obstacle should notbe overloaded. A floor must not be-come so crowded that soldiers arebumped off. Soldiers should not jumpto the ground from above the firstlevel.

Jump and Land. Soldiers climb theladder to the platform and jump to theground.Confidence Climb. Soldiers climb theinclined ladder to the vertical ladder.they go to the top of the vertical ladder,then down the other side to the ground.Belly Robber. Soldiers step on thelower log and take a prone position onthe horizontal logs. They crawl overthe logs to the opposite end of theobstacle. Rope gaskets must be tied tothe ends of each log to keep the handsfrom being pinched and the logs fromfalling.The Tough One. Soldiers climb therope or pole on the lowest end of theobstacle. They go over or between thelogs at the top of the rope. They moveacross the log walkway, climb theladder to the high end, then climbdown the cargo net to the ground.

Figure 8-11

8-10

Page 136: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Rifle Drills

Rifle drills are suitable activities forfitness training while bivouacking orduring extended time in the field. Inmost situations, the time consumed indrawing weapons makes this activitycumbersome for garrison use. How-ever, it is a good conditioning activity,and the use of individual weapons intraining fosters a warrior’s spirit.

There are four rifle-drill exercisesthat develop the upper body. They arenumbered in a set pattern. The mainmuscle groups strengthened by rifledrills are those of the arms, shoulders,and back.

Rifle drill is a fast-moving methodof exercising that soldiers can do in aslittle as 15 minutes. With imagination,the number of steps and/or rifle exer-cises can be expanded beyond thosedescribed here.

EXERCISE PROGRESSION

The rifle-drill exercise normallybegins with six repetitions and in-creases by one repetition for each threeperiods of exercise. This rate contin-ues until soldiers can do 12 repetitions.However, the number of repetitionscan be adjusted as the soldiers im-prove.

In exercises that start from the rifle-downward position, on the command“Move,” soldiers execute port arms andassume the starting position. At theend of the exercise, the command to

return soldiers to attention is “Positionof attention, move.”

In exercises that end in other thanthe rifle-downward position, soldiersassume that position before executingport arms and order arms.

These movements are done withoutcommand and need not be precise.Effective rifle exercises are strenuousenough to tire the arms. When thearms are tired, moving them withprecision is difficult.

RIFLE DRILL EXERCISES

The following exercises are for usein rifle drills.

Up and Forward

This is a four-count exercise doneat a fast cadence. (See Figure 8-12.)

Fore-Up, Squat

This is a four-count exercise doneat a moderate cadence. (See Figure8-13.)

Fore-Up, Behind Back

This is a four-count exercise doneat a moderate cadence. (See Figure 8-14.)

Fore-Up, Back Bend

This is a four-count exercise done atmoderate cadence. (See Figure 8- 15.)

Figure 8-12

8-11

Page 137: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 8-13

Figure 8-14

Figure 8-15

8-12

Page 138: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Log Drills

Log drills are excellent

for developing strength

and muscular endurance,

because they require the

muscles to contract

under heavy loads.

Log drills are team-conditioningexercises. They are excellent for de-veloping strength and muscular endur-ance because they require the musclesto contract under heavy loads. Theyalso develop teamwork and add varietyto the PT program.

Log drills consist of six differentexercises numbered in a set pattern.The drills are intense, and teams shouldcomplete them in 15 minutes. Theteams have six to eight soldiers perteam. A principal instructor is re-quired to teach, demonstrate, and leadthe drill. He must be familiar withleadership techniques for conditioningexercises and techniques peculiar to logdrills.

AREA AND EQUIPMENT

Any level area is good for doing logdrills. All exercises are done from astanding position. If the group is largerthan a platoon, an instructor’s standmay be needed.

The logs should be from six to eightinches thick, and they may vary from14 to 18 feet long for six and eight sol-diers, respectively. The logs should bestripped, smoothed, and dried. The14-foot logs weigh about 300 pounds,the 18-foot logs about 400 pounds.Rings should be painted on the logs toshow each soldier’s position. When notin use, the logs are stored on a rackabove the ground.

FORMATION

All soldiers assigned to a log teamshould be about the same height at theshoulders. The best way to divide aplatoon is to have them form a singlefile or column with short soldiers infront and tall soldiers at the rear. Theytake their positions in the column ac-cording to shoulder height, not headheight. When they are in position, theyare divided into teams of six or eight.

The command is “Count off by sixes(or eights), count off.” Each team, inturn, goes to the log rack, shoulders alog, and carries it to the exercise area.

The teams form columns in front ofthe instructor. Holding the logs inchest position, they face the instructorand ground the log. Ten yards shouldseparate log teams within the columns.If more than one column is used, 10yards should separate columns.

STARTING DOSAGE ANDPROGRESSION

The starting session is six repeti-tions of each exercise. The progres-sion rate is an increase of one repeti-tion for each three periods of exercise.Soldiers continue this rate until theydo 12 repetitions with no rest betweenexercises. This level is maintained un-til another drill is used.

START POSITIONS

The soldiers fall in facing their log,with toes about four inches away.Figure 8-16 shows the basic startingpositions and commands.

Right-Hand Start Position, Move

On the command “Move,” move theleft foot 12 inches to the left, andlower the body into a flatfooted squat.Keep the back straight, head up, andarms between the legs. Encircle thefar side of the log with the left hand.Place the right hand under the log.(See 1, Figure 8-16.)

Left-Hand Start Position, Move

This command is done the sameway as the preceding command.However, the left hand is under thelog, and the right hand encircles its farside. (See 2, Figure 8-16.)

8-13

Page 139: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Right-Shoulder Position, Move left foot to the rear and stand up,facing left. Balance the log on the right

This command is given from the shoulder with both hands. (See 3,right-hand-start position. On the Figure 8-16.) This movement cannotcommand “Move,” pull the log upward be done from the left-hand-start posi-in one continuous motion to the right tion because of the position of theshoulder. At the same time, move the hands.

Figure 8-16

8-14

Page 140: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Left-Shoulder Position, Move

This command is given from theleft-hand-start position. On the com-mand “Move, ” pull the log upward tothe left shoulder in one continuousmotion. At the same time, move theright foot to the rear, and stand upfacing right. Balance the log on the leftshoulder with both hands. (See 4,Figure 8-17.) This movement cannotbe done from the right-hand-startposition.

Waist Position, Move

From the right-hand-start position,pull the log waist high. Keep the armsstraight and fingers laced under thelog. The body is inclined slightly to therear, and the chest is lifted and arched.(See 5, Figure 8-17.)

Chest Position, Move

This command is given after takingthe waist position. On the command“Move,” shift the log to a position highon the chest, bring the left arm underthe log, and hold the log in the bend ofthe arms. (See 6, figure 8-17.) Keepthe upper arms parallel to the ground.

To move the log from the right tothe left shoulder, the command is“Left-shoulder position, move.” Pushthe log overhead, and lower it to theopposite shoulder.

To return the log to the groundfrom any of the above positions, thecommand is “Start position, move.” Atthe command “Move,” slowly lower thelog to the ground. Position the handsand fingers so they are not under thelog.

Figure 8-17

8-15

Page 141: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

LOG-DRILL EXERCISES

The following are log-drillcises.

Exercise 2. Forward BenderStart Position: Chest position, with

exer- feet about shoulder-width apart.(See 2, Figure 8-18.)Cadence: Moderate.

Exercise 1. Two-Arm Push-Up Movement A four-count exercise;Start Position: Right- or left-shoulder position, with feet aboutshoulder-width apart. (See 1, Fig-ure 8-18.)Cadence: Moderate.Movement: A four-count exercise;at the count of --

“One’’-Push the log overhead untilthe elbows lock.“Two’’-Lower the log to the op-posite shoulder.“Three’’-Repeat the action of countone.“Four’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.

at the count of --“One’’-Bend forward at the waistwhile keeping the back straightand the knees slightly bent.“Two’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.‘Three’’-Repeat the action of countone.“Four’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.

Figure 8-18

8-16

Page 142: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Exercise 3. Straddle JumpStart Position Right- or left-shoul-der position, with feet together,and fingers locked on top of the log.Pull the log down with both hands tokeep it from bouncing on the shoul-der. (See 3, Figure 8-19.)Cadence: Moderate.Movement A four-count exercise;at the count of--

“One’’-Jump to a side straddle.“Two’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.‘Three’’-Repeat the action of countone.“Four’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.

Exercise 4. Side BenderStart Position: Right-shoulder po-sition with the feet about shoul-der-width apart. (See 4, Figure8- 19.)Cadence Moderate.Movement: A four-count exercise;at the count of--

“One’’-Bend sideward to the leftas far as possible, bending theleft knee.“Two’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.“Three’’-Repeat the action ofcount one.“Four’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.

NOTE: After doing the requirednumber of repetitions, change shoul-ders and do an equal number to theright side.

Figure 8-19

8-17

Page 143: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Exercise 5. Half-Knee BendStart Position: Right- or lef t-shoulder position, with feet aboutshoulder-width apart, and fingerslocked on top of the log. (See 5,Figure 8-20.)Cadence: Slow.Movement: A four-count exercise;at the count of --

“One’’-Flex the knees to a half-knee bend.“Two’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.“Three’’-Repeat the action ofcount one.“Four’’-Recover to the start po-sition.

(NOTE: Pull forward and down-ward on the log throughout the exer-cise. )

Exercise 6. Overhead Toss (NOTE:Introduce this exercise only aftersoldiers have gained experience andstrength by doing the other exercisesfor several sessions.)

Start Position: Right-shoulder po-sition with the feet about shoul-der-width part. The knees are at aquarter bend. (See 6, Figure 8-20.)Cadence: Moderate.Movement: A four-count exercise;at the count of --

“One’’-Straighten the knees andtoss the log about 12 inchesoverhead. Catch the log withboth hands, and lower it towardthe opposite shoulder. As the logis caught, lower the body into aquarter bend.“Two’’-Again, toss the log intothe air and, when caught, returnit to the original shoulder.“Three’’-Repeat the action of countone.“Four’’-Recover to the start posi-tion.

Figure 8-20

8-18

Page 144: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Aquatic Exercise SAMPLE TRAINING PROGRAM

Aquatics is a mode of physicaltraining which helps one attain andmaintain physical fitness through ex-ercises in the water. It is sometimescalled slimnastics. Aquatic trainingcan improve muscular endurance, CRendurance, flexibility, coordination,and muscular strength.

Because of its very low impact to thebody, an aquatic exercise program isideal for soldiers who are overweightand those who are limited due topainful joints, weak muscles, or pro-files. The body’s buoyancy helpsminimize injuries to the joints of thelower legs and feet. It exercises thewhole body without jarring the bonesand muscles. Leaders can tailor thevariety and intensity of the exercises tothe needs of all the soldiers in the unit.

Aquatic training is a good supple-ment to a unit’s PT program. Not onlyis it fun, it exposes soldiers to waterand can make them more comfortablearound it. Most Army installationshave swimming pools for conductingaquatic, physical training sessions.

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

One qualified lifeguard is neededfor every 40 soldiers at all aquatictraining sessions. Nonswimmers mustremain in the shallow end of the pool.They should never exercise in the deepend with or without flotation devices.

EQUIPMENT

Soldiers normally wear swim suitsfor aquatics, but they can wear bootsand fatigues to increase the intensity ofthe activities. The following equip-ment is optional for training:● Goggles.● Kickboard.● Pull buoy.● Ear/nose plugs.● Fins.● Hand paddles.

‘Warm-Up

As in any PT session, a warm-up isrequired. It can be done in the wateror on the deck. Allow five to sevenminutes for the warm-up.

Conditioning Phase

Soldiers should exercise vigorouslyto get a training effect. Energeticmusic may be used to keep up thetempo of the workout. The followingare some exercises that can be used inan aquatic workout. (See Figure 8-21.)

Side Leg-Raises. Stand in chest toshoulder-deep water with either sideof the body at arm’s length to the wallof the pool, and grasp the edge withthe nearest hand. Raise the outside legsideward and upward from the hip.Next, pull the leg down to the startingposition. Repeat these actions. Then,turn the other side of the body to thewall, and perform the exercise withthe other leg. DURATION: 30 seconds(15 seconds per leg).

Leg-Over. Stand in chest-to shoul-der-deep water, back facing the wallof the pool. Reach backward with thearms extended, and grasp the pool’sedge. Next, raise one leg in front ofthe body away from the wall, andmove it sideward toward the other legas far as it can go. Then, return the legto the front-extended position, andlower it to the starting position. Repeatthese actions with the other leg, andcontinue to alternate legs. DURA-TION: 30 seconds ( 15 seconds per leg).

Rear Leg Lift. Stand in chest-toshoulder-deep water with hands onthe pool’s edge, chest to the wall. Raiseone leg back and up from the hip,extend it, and point the foot. Then,pull the leg back to the starting posi-tion. Alternate these actions back andforth with each leg. DURATION: 20seconds (10 seconds each leg).

8-19

Page 145: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 8-21

8-20

Page 146: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Alternate Toe Touch. Stand inwaist-deep water. Raise the left leg asin kicking while touching the elevatedtoe with the right hand. At the sametime, rotate the head toward the leftshoulder, and push the left arm back-ward through the water. Alternatethese actions back and forth with eachleg and opposite hand. DURATION 2minutes.

Side Straddle Hop. Stand in waist-deep water with hands on hips and feettogether. Jump sideward and land withfeet about two feet apart. Then, returnto the starting position, and repeat thejumping action. DURATION 2 min-utes.

Stride Hop. Stand in waist-deepwater with hands on hips and feettogether. Jump, moving the left legforward and right leg backward. Then,jump again moving the right leg for-ward and left leg backward. Repeatthese actions. DURATION 2 minutes.

The Bounce. Stand in waist-deepwater with hands on hips and feettogether. Jump high with feet together.Upon landing, use a bouncing motion,and repeat the action. DURATION: 1minute.

Rise on Toes. Stand in chest-toshoulder-deep water with arms at sidesand feet together. Rise up using thetoes. Then, lower the body to thestarting position. Repeat the action.DURATION: 1 minute.

Side Bender. Stand in waist-deepwater with the left arm at the side andthe right arm extended straight over-head. Stretch slowly, bending to theleft. Recover to the starting position,and repeat the action. Next, reverse tothe right arm at the side and the leftarm extended straight overhead. Re-peat the stretching action to the rightside. DURATION: 1 minute.

Walking Crawl. Walk in waist- tochest-deep water. Simulate the over-hand crawl stroke by reaching out with

the left hand cupped and pressing thewater downward to the thigh. Repeatthe action with the right hand. Alter-

nate left and right arm action. DURA-TION: 2 minutes.

Bouncing. Stand in chest-deepwater, arms at sides. Bounce on the leftfoot while pushing down vigorouslywith both hands. Repeat the actionwith the right foot. Alternate bounc-ing on the left and right foot. DURA-TION: 2 minutes.

Bounding in Place with AlternateArm Stretch, Forward. Bound in

place in waist-deep water using highknee action. Stretch the right arm farforward when the left knee is high andthe left arm is stretched backward.When the position of the arm is re-versed, simulate the action of thecrawl stroke by pulling down andthrough the water with the hand.DURATION 1 minute.

Poolside Knees Up, Supine. Standin chest-to shoulder-deep water, backagainst the wall of the pool. Extendthe arms backward, and grasp thepool’s edge. With feet together, ex-tend the legs in front of the torso, andassume a supine position. Then withthe legs together, raise the knees tothe chin. Return to the starting posi-tion, and repeat the action. DURA-TION: 2 minutes (maximum effort).

Twisting Legs, Supine. Stand inchest-to shoulder-deep water, backagainst the wall of the pool. Extend thearms backward, and grasp the pool’sedge. With feet together, extend thelegs in front of the torso, and assumea supine position. Then, twist the legsslowly to the left, return to the startingposition, and twist the legs slowly tothe right. Repeat this twisting action.DURATION: 1 minute (2 sets, 30seconds each).

Scissor Kick. Float in chest- toshoulder- deep water on either side of

the body with the top arm extended,hand holding the pool’s edge. Bracethe bottom hand against the pool’s wallwith feet below the water’s surface.Next, assume a crouching position bygringing the heels toward the hips by

8-21

Page 147: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

bending the knees. Then, straightenand spread the legs with the top legextending backward. When the legs areextended and spread, squeeze themback together (scissoring). Pull withthe top hand, and push with thebottom hand. The propulsive force ofthe kick will tend to cause the body torise to the water’s surface. DURA-TION 1 minute (2 sets, 30 secondseach, maximum effort).

Push Away. Stand in chest-toshoulder-deep water facing the pool’swall and at arm’s length from it. Graspthe pool’s edge, and bend the arms sothat the body is leaning toward thewall of the pool. Vigorously push thechest back from the wall by straight-ening the arms. Then, with equalvigor, pull the upper body back to thewall. Repeat these actions. DURA-TION: 2 minutes (maximum effort).

Gutter Push-Ups. Stand in chest-to shoulder- deep water facing thepool’s wall. Place the hands on the edgeor gutter of the pool. Then, raise thebody up and out of the water while ex-tending the arms. repeat this action.DURATION: 2 minutes (4 sets, 30seconds each with 5-second rests be-tween sets).

Front Flutter Kick. Stand in chest-to shoulder-deep water facing the pool’swall. Grasp the pool’s edge or gutterand assume a prone position with legsextended just below the water’s sur-face. Then, kick flutter style, toespointed, ankles flexible, knee jointloose but straight. The Iegs shouldsimulate a whip’s action. DURATION1 minute (2 sets, 30 seconds each).

Running. Move in a running gaitin chest-to shoulder-deep water witharms and hands under the water’ssurface. This activity can be stationary,or the exerciser may run from poolsideto poolside. Runners must concentrateon high knee action and good armmovement. DURATION 10 to 20

The Engine. Stand in chest-toshoulder-deep water, arms straight andin front of the body and parallel to thewater with the palms facing down-ward. While walking forward, raisethe left knee to the left elbow, thenreturn to the starting position. Con-tinuing to walk forward, touch theright knee to the right elbow, andreturn to the starting position. Be sureto keep the arms parallel to the waterthroughout the exercise. DURATION1 to 2 minutes (2 sets).

Cool-Down

This is required to gradually bringthe body back to its pre-exercise state.It should last from five to seven min-utes.

minutes.

8-22

Page 148: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Factors that affect the content ofthe sports program differ at everyArmy installation and unit. Initiativeand ingenuity in planning are the mostvital assets. They are encouraged inthe conduct of every program.

OBJECTIVES A well-organized and executedintramural program yields the follow-ing: • Team spirit, the will to win, confi- dence, aggressiveness, and team- work. All are vital to combat effec- tiveness. • A change from the routine PT pro- gram. • The chance for all soldiers to take part in organized athletics.

Competitive fitness activities help in the development of assets that are vital to combat effectiveness.

Physical fitness is one of the foun-dations of combat readiness, and main-taining it must be an integral part ofevery soldier’s life. This chapter dis-cusses competitive fitness activitiesand athletic events that commanderscan use to add variety to a unit’sphysical fitness program. There is alsoa section on developing a unit intramu-ral program. Athletic and competi-tive fitness activities are sports eventswhich should only be used to supple-ment the unit’s PT program. Theyshould never replace physical trainingand conditioning sessions but, rather,should exist to give soldiers a chancefor healthy competition. Only throughconsistent, systematic physical condi-tioning can the fitness components bedeveloped and maintained.

Crucial to the success of any pro-gram is the presence and enthusiasm ofthe leaders who direct and participatein it. The creativity of the physicaltraining planners also plays a large role.Competitive fitness and athletic activi-ties must be challenging. They must bepresented in the spirit of fair play andgood competition.

It is generally accepted that com-petitive sports have a tremendous posi-tive influence on the physical andemotional development of the partici-pants. Sports competition can enhancea soldier’s combat readiness by pro-moting the development of coordina-tion, agility, balance, and speed. Com-petitive fitness activities also help de-velop assets that are vital to combat ef-fectiveness. These include team spirit,the will to win, confidence, toughness,aggressiveness, and teamwork.

Intramural

The Army’s sports mission is to giveall soldiers a chance to participate insports activities. A unit-level intra-mural program can help achieve thisimportant goal. DA Pam 28-6 de-scribes how to organize various unit-level intramural programs.

ORGANIZATION

The command level best suited toorganize and administer a broad intra-mural program varies according to aunit’s situation. If the objective ofmaximum participation is to beachieved, organization should start atcompany level and then provide com-petition up through higher unit levels.Each command level should have itsown program and support the nexthigher program level.

To successfully organize and con-duct an intramural program, develop-ers should consider the following fac-tors and elements.

Authority

The unit commander should pub-lish and endorse a directive giving au-thorization and guidance for a sportsprogram. A detailed SOP should alsobe published.

Personnel

Leaders at all levels of the intramu-ral program should plan, organize, andsupervise it. Appointments at all

9-1

Page 149: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

echelons should be made for at leastone year to provide continuity. Thecommander must appoint a qualifiedperson to be the director, regardless ofthe local situation, type, and size of theunit. The director must be a good or-ganizer and administrator and musthave time to do the job correctly. Heshould also have a sense of impartial-ity and some athletic experience.

Commanders should form an intra-mural sports council in units of battal-ion size or larger and should appointmembers or require designated unitrepresentatives. The council shouldmeet at least once a month or as oftenas the situation requires. The councilserves as an advisory body to the unitcommander and intramural director. Itgives guidance about the organizationand conduct of the program.

Facilities and Equipment

Adequate facilities and equipmentmust be available. When facilities arelimited, leaders must plan activities toensure their maximum use. In allcases, activities must be planned toensure the safety of participants andspectators.

Funds and Budget

Adequate funds are essential tosuccessfully organize and operate asports program. Therefore, before-hand, organizers must determine howmuch money is available to support it.To justify requests for funds they must

prepare a budget in which they justifyeach sports activity separately. Thebudget must include special equip-ment, supplies, awards, pay for offi-cials, and other items and services.Units can reduce many of their costsby being resourceful.

Commanders can

stimulate soldiers to

par t i c ipa te i n

competitive athletics by

using an award system. AWARD SYSTEM

Commanders can stimulate unitsand soldiers to participate in competi-tive athletics by using an award sys-tem. One type is a point-award systemwhere teams get points based on theirwin/loss records and/or final leaguestandings. This reflects the unit’sstandings in the overall intramuralsports program. The recognition willhelp make units and individuals par-ticipate throughout the year. Trophiescan then be given for overall perform-ance and individual activities.

PROGRAM PLANNING

A successful program depends onsound plans and close coordinationbetween the units involved. Theintramural director should meet withsubordinate commanders or a sportsrepresentative to determine what pro-gram of activities is compatible withthe mission and training activities ofeach unit. Unless they resolve thisissue, they may not get commandsupport which, in turn, could result inforfeitures or lack of participation.The less-popular activities may not besupported because of a lack of interest.

9-2

Page 150: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Evaluations

Before the program is developed,leaders must study the training andavailability situation at each unit level.They should include the followingitems in a survey to help them deter-mine the scope of the program and todevelop plans:●

General. Evaluate the commander’sattitude, philosophy, and policyabout the sports program. Understand the types of units to beserved, their location, the climate,and military responsibilities.Troops. Determine the following:1) number and types of personnel;2) training status and general dutyassignment; 3) special needs, inter-ests, and attitudes.Time available. Coordinate thetime available for the sports pro-gram with the military mission.Determine both the on-duty andoff-duty time soldiers have for takingpart in sports activities.Equipment. Consider the equip-ment that will be needed for eachsport.Facilities. Determine the number,type, and location of recreationalfacilities both within the unit and inthose controlled by units at higherlevels.

• Funds. Determine how much eachunit can spend on the intramuralprogram.

• Personnel. Assess how many peopleare needed to run the program. Thelist should include a director and assistants, sports council, officials,and team captains, as well as volunteers for such tasks as setting up aplaying field.

• Coordination. Coordinate with theunits’ operations sections to avoidconflict with military training schedules.

• Activities. The intramural directorshould plan a tentative program ofactivities based on the season, localsituation, and needs and interests ofthe units. Both team and individualsports should be included. Someteam sports are popular at all levelsand need little promotional effortfor success. Among these are vol-leyball, touch football, basketball,and softball. Some individual com-petitive sports have direct militaryvalue. They include boxing, wres-tling, track and field, cross country,triathlon, biathlon, and swimming.While very popular, these sports areharder to organize than team sports.See Figures 9-1 and 9-2 for a list ofsports activities.

9-3

Page 151: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 9-1

Figure 9-2

9-4

Page 152: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Table 9-1

Functions

Once the evaluations have beenmade, the following functions shouldbe performed:●

Make a handbook. An intramuralhandbook should be published ateach level of command from instal-lation to company to serve as astanding operating procedure (SOP).This handbook should include theessential elements listed in Table9-1 above.Plan the calendar. Local situationsand normal obstacles may conflictwith the intramural program. However, a way can be found to providea scheduled program for every sea-son of the year.Choose the type of competition.Intramural directors should be ableto choose the type of competitionbest suited for the sport and localcircumstances. They should alsoknow how to draw up tournaments.Unless the competition must takeplace in a short time, eliminationtournaments should not be used.The round-robin tournament hasthe greatest advantage because indi-viduals and teams are never elimi-nated. This type of competition isadaptable to both team and individ-ual play. It is appropriate for smallnumbers of entries and league playin any sport.

● Make a printed schedule. Usingscheduling forms makes this jobeasier. The form should includegame number, time, date, court orfield, and home or visiting team.Space for scores and officials is alsohelpful. Championship games ormatches should be scheduled totake place at the best facility.

Unit Activities

The following games and activitiesmay be included in the unit’s PTprogram, They are large-scale activi-ties which can combine many compo-nents of physical and motor fitness. Inaddition, they require quick thinkingand the use of strategy. When playedvigorously, they are excellent activi-ties for adding variety to the program.

NINE-BALL SOCCER

The object of this game is forof a team’s five goalies to haveball.

Players

eachone

There are 25 to 50 players on eachteam, five of whom are goalies. Theother players are divided into fourequal groups. The goalies play be-tween the goal line and 5-yard line of

9-5

Page 153: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

a standard football field. The otherfour groups start the game between thedesignated 10-yard segments of thefield. (See Figure 9-3.) The goaliesand all other players must stay in theirassigned areas throughout the game.The only exceptions are midfielderwho stand between the 35- and 45-yard lines. These players may occupyboth their assigned areas and the 10-yard free space at the center of thefield.

The Game

The game starts with all playersinside their own areas and midfielderon their own 40-yard line. The nineballs are placed as follows. Four are oneach 45-yard line with at least fiveyards between balls. One is centeredon the 50-yard line. The signal to startplay is one long whistle blast. Playersmust pass the balls through the oppos-ing team’s defenses into the goal areausing only their feet or heads. Thefirst team whose goalies have five ballswins a point. The game then stops, andthe balls are placed for the start of anew set. The first team to score fivepoints wins.

There are no time-outs except incase of injury, which is signaled by twosharp whistle blasts. The teams changepositions on the field after each set.Team members move to different zonesafter the set.

Rules

A ball is played along the ground orover any group or groups of players.The ball may travel any distance if it isplayed legally.

Goalies may use their hands inplaying the ball and may give a ball toother goalies on their team. For a setto officially end, each goalie must havea ball.

If players engage in unnecessaryroughness or dangerous play, the refe-ree removes them from the game forthe rest of the set and one additionalset. He also removes players for therest of the set if they step on or over aboundary or sideline or use their handsoutside the goal area.

If a goalie steps on or over aboundary or sideline, the referee takesthe ball being played plus another ballfrom the goalie’s team and gives theseballs to the nearest opposing player. If

Figure 9-3

9-6

Page 154: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

the team has no other ball in the goalarea, the referee limits the penalty tothe ball that is being played.

If a ball goes out of bounds, thereferee retrieves it. The team thatcaused it to go out of bounds or overthe goal line loses possession. Thereferee puts the ball back into play byrolling it to the nearest opposing player.

PUSHBALL

This game requires a large pushballthat is five to six feet in diameter. Italso requires a level playing surfacethat is 240 to 300 feet long and 120 to150 feet wide. The length of the fieldis divided equally by a center line.Two more lines are marked 15 feetfrom and parallel to the end lines andextending across the entire field. (SeeFigure 9-4.)

Players

There are 10 to 50 soldiers on eachof two teams.

The Game

The object of the game is to sendthe ball over the opponent’s goal lineby pushing, rolling, passing, carrying,or using any method other than kick-ing the ball.

The game begins when the ball isplaced on the centerline with the op-posing captains three feet away fromit. The other players line up 45 feetfrom the ball on their half of the field.At the referee’s starting whistle, thecaptains immediately play the ball,and their teams come to their aid.

At quarter time, the ball stays deadfor two minutes where it was when thequarter ended. At halftime, the teamsexchange goals, and play resumes as ifthe game were beginning.

A team scores a goal when it sendsthe ball across the opposing team’s endline. A goal counts five points. Theteam that scores a goal may then tryfor an extra point. For the extra point,the ball is placed on the opposingteam’s 5-yard line, and the teams line

Figure 9-4

9-7

Page 155: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

up across the field separated by thewidth of the ball. Only one player mayplace his hands on the ball. The playerwho just scored is directly in front ofthe ball. At the referee’s signal, theball is put into play for one minute. Ifany part of the ball is driven across thegoal line in this period, the offensescores one point. The defense may notscore during the extra point attempt.

The game continues until four 10-minute quarters have been played.Rest periods are allowed for two min-utes between quarters and five min-utes at halftime.

Rules

Players may use any means ofinterfering with the opponents’ prog-ress except striking and clipping.Clipping is throwing one’s body acrossthe back of an opponent’s legs as he isrunning or standing. Force may le-gally be applied to all opponents whetherthey are playing the ball or not. Aplayer who strikes or clips an opponentis removed from the game, and histeam is penalized half the distance toits goal.

When any part of the ball goes outof bounds, it is dead. The teams lineup at right angles to the sidelines.They should be six feet apart at thepoint where the ball went out. Thereferee tosses the ball between theteams.

When, for any reason, the ball istied up in one spot for more than 10seconds, the referee declares it dead.He returns the ball into play the sameway he does after it goes out ofbounds.

STRATEGY PUSHBALL

Strategy pushball is similar to push-ball except that it is played on twoadjacent fields, and opposing teamssupply soldiers to the games on both

fields. Team commanders assess thesituation on the fields and distributetheir soldiers accordingly. The com-mander decides the number of soldiersused, within limits imposed by therules. This number may be adjustedthroughout the game. Play on bothfields occurs at the same time, but eachgame progresses independently. At theend of play, a team’s points from bothfields are added together to determinethe overall winner.

This game requires two pushballsthat are five to six feet in diameter.Pull-over vests or jerseys of two dif-ferent colors are used by each team fora total of four different colors. Start-ers and reserves should be easily dis-tinguishable. Starters and substitutesshould wear vests of one color, whilethe team commander and reserves wearvests of the second color.

Players may wear any type of ath-letic shoes except those with metalcleats. Combat boots may be worn, butextra caution must be used to preventinjuries caused by kicking or steppingon other players. Soldiers wearingillegal equipment may not play untilthe problem has been corrected.

The playing area is two lined-offfields. These are 240 to 300 feet longby 120 to 150 feet wide. They areseparated lengthwise by a 20-foot-wide divider strip. The length of eachfield is divided equally by a centerlinethat is parallel to the goal lines. Linesare also marked 45 feet from each sideof the centerline and parallel to it. Thelines extend across both fields. Di-mensions may be determined locallybased on available space and the numberof players. The space between thefields is the team area. Each teamoccupies the third of the team spacethat immediately adjoins its initialplaying field.

Time periods should be adjusted tosuit weather conditions and soldiers’fitness levels.

9-8

Page 156: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Players Runners serve at least one period;they may not play during that period.

There are 25 to 40 soldiers on each They are allowed on the field onlyteam. A typical, 25-member team has during breaks in play after a dead ballthe following: or goal.

One team commander. He is respon-sible for overall game strategy andfor determining the number and po-sitions of players on the field.Sixteen starting members. Eight areon each field at all times; one isappointed field captain.Four reserve members. These areplayers the team commander des-ignates as reinforcements.Three substitutes. These are re-placements for starters or reserves.One runner. He is designated toconvey messages from the teamcommander to field captains.The proportion of soldiers in each

category stays constant regardless ofthe total number on a team. Before theevent, game organizers must coordi-nate with participating units and agreeon the number on each team.

Reserves are used at any point inthe game on either field and are com-mitted as individuals or groups. Theymay enter or leave the playing field atany time whether the ball is in play ornot. Team commanders may enter thegame as reserves if they see the needfor such action.

Reserves, substitutes, and startingmembers may be redesignated into anyof the other components on a one-for-one basis only during dead balls, in-jury time-outs, or quarter- and half-time breaks. A reserve may becomea starter by switching vests with anoriginal starter, who then becomes areserve.

When possible, senior NCOS andofficers from higher headquarters orother units should be used as officials.Players must not question an official’s

Figure 9-5

9 - 9

Page 157: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

authority during play. Otherwise, thegame can quickly get out of control.

Cha in -o f -command pe r sonne lshould act as team commanders andfield captains whenever possible.

The Game

The object is to propel the ball overthe opponent’s goal line by pushing,rolling, passing, carrying, or using anymeans other than kicking.

The game is officiated by two refe-rees on each field, a chief umpire, anda scorekeeper. Referees concentrateon player actions so that they canquickly detect fouls and assess penal-ties. The chief umpire and score-keeper occupy any area where theycan best officiate the games. The chiefumpire monitors the use of substitutesand reserves and ensures smooth prog-ress of the games on both fields. Thenumber of officials may be increasedif teams have more than 25 players.Referees use their whistles to stop andstart play except at the start and end ofeach quarter. The scorekeeper, whotimes the game with a stopwatch, startsand ends each quarter and stops playfor injuries with some noisemakerother than a whistle. He may use suchdevices as a starter’s pistol, klaxon, orair horn.

The game begins after the ball isplaced on each field’s center mark.Opposing field captains are three feetfrom the ball (six feet from the center-line). The rest of the starters are linedup 45 feet from the ball on their halfof the field. (See Figure 9-5.) At thescorekeeper’s signal, field captainsimmediately play the ball, and theirteams come to their aid.

Starters may be exchanged betweenthe fields if the minimum number ofstarters or substitutes per field ismaintained.

Substitutes may enter the game onlyduring breaks in play after a deadball, goal, or time-out for injury.

A substitute may not start to play untilthe player being replaced leaves thefield.

When any part of the ball goes outof bounds, it is dead. The teams lineup at right angles to the sidelines; theyare 10 feet apart at the point where theball went out of bounds. The refereeplaces the ball between the teams at apoint 15 feet inside the sideline. Playresumes when the referee blows thewhistle.

When the ball gets tied up in onespot for more than 10 seconds for anyreason, the referee declares it dead. Herestarts play as with an out-of-boundsdead ball, except that he puts the ballon the spot where it was stopped.

Time does not stop for dead balls orgoals. Play continues on one fieldwhile dead balls are restarted on theother.

At each quarter break, the ball stayson the spot where it was when thequarter ended. The next quarter, sig-naled by the scorekeeper, starts as itdoes after a ball goes out of bounds. Athalftime the teams exchange goals, andplay resumes as if the game werebeginning.

A goal is scored when any part ofthe ball breaks the plane of the goalline between the sidelines. A goalcounts one point. At the end of thefourth quarter, the points of each teamfrom both fields are added together todetermine the winner.

If there is a tie, a three-minuteovertime is played. It is played thesame as in regulation play, but only onefield is used, with starting squads fromboth teams opposing each other. Forcontrol purposes, no more than 15players per team are allowed on thefield at once. The team with morepoints at the end of the overtime winsthe game. If the game is still tied whentime expires, the winner is the teamthat has gained more territory.

The game continues until four 10-minute quarters have been played.There is a 10-minute halftime between

9-10

Page 158: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

the second and third quarters. Theclock stops at quarter breaks andhalftime. Time-out is allowed only forserious injury. Play is then stopped onboth fields.

Rules

Players may use any means of inter-fering with their opponents’ progress,but they are penalized for striking orclipping opponents or throwing themto the ground. These penalties areenforced by the referees. Force maybelegally applied to any opponent whetheror not they are playing the ball. Block-ing is allowed if blockers stay on theirfeet and limit contact to the spacebetween waist and shoulders. Blockersmay not swing, throw, or flip theirelbows or forearms. Tackling opposingsoldiers who are playing the ball isallowed. The chief umpire or anyreferee may call infractions and im-pose penalties for unsportsmanlikeconduct or personal fouls on eitherfield. Penalties may also be called forinfractions committed on the field orsidelines during playing time, quarter-and halftime breaks, and time-outs.Personal fouls are called for the fol-lowing:● Illegal blocking (below an oppo-

nent’s waist).● Clipping (throwing the body across

the back of the opponent’s legs as heis running or standing).

● Throwing an opponent to the ground(that is, lifting and dropping orslamming a player to the ground instead of tackling cleanly).

● Spearing, tackling, or piling on anopponent who is already on theground.

● Striking or punching with closedfist(s).

● Grasping an opponent’s neck orhead.

● Kicking.● Butting heads.

Unsportsmanlike conduct is calledfor abusive or insulting language that

the referee judges to be excessive andblatant. It is also called against aplayer on the sidelines who interfereswith the ball or with his opponents onthe field. A player who violates theserules should be removed from thegame and made to run one lap aroundboth playing fields. A penalizedplayer leaves the team shorthandeduntil he completes the penalty lap andthe next break in play occurs on thefield from which he was removed.The penalized player or a substitutethen enters the game. Referees andthe chief umpire may, at their discre-tion, eject any player who is a chronicviolator or who is judged to be danger-ous to other players, Once ejected, theplayer must leave both the field ofplay and team area. Substitutes forejected players may enter during thenext break in play that follows a goalscored by either team. They enter onthe field from which the players wereejected.

BROOM-BALL HOCKEY

This game is played on ice or afrozen field using hockey rules. Play-ers wear boots with normal soles andcarry broom-shaped sticks with whichthey hit the ball into the goals.

The object of this game is for teamsto score goals through the opponent’sdefenses. Using only brooms, playerspass the ball through the opposingteam to reach its goal. The first teamto score five points wins. Broom ballprovides a good cardiorespiratory work-out.

Players

There are 15 to 20 players on eachteam. One is a goalie and the others aredivided into three equal groups. Thegoalie plays in the goal area of astandard soccer or hockey field oralong the goal line if the two opposinggoals are the same size. One soccerball, or some other type of inflated

9-11

Page 159: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

ball, is used. The players need nopadding.

The three groups begin the game incenter field. All players must stay intheir designated space throughout thegame. A diagram of the field is shownat Figure 9-6.

The Game

The face-off marks the start of thegame, the second half, and the restartof play after goals. Each half lasts 15minutes. For the face-off, each playeris on his own half of the field. Allplayers, except the two centers, areoutside the center circle. The refereeplaces the ball in the center of thecircle between the two centers. Thesignal to begin play is one long blast onthe whistle. The ball must travelforward and cross the center circlebefore being played by another player.There are no time-outs except forinjury. The time-out signal is twosharp whistle blasts.

Rules

All players, including goalies, muststay inside their legal boundaries at all

times. Only goalies may use theirhands to play the ball, but they mustalways keep control of their sticks.Other players must stay in their re-spective zones of play (Attack, De-fense, Centerfield). The ball is playedalong the ground or over one or moregroups of players. It may travel anydistance as long as it is legally played.

The referee calls infractions andimposes penalties. Basic penalties arethose called for the following:● Unnecessary roughness or danger-

ous play. (The player is removedfrom the game; he stays in thepenalty box for two minutes.)

● Ball out-of-bounds. (The team thatcaused it to go out loses posses-sion, and the opposing team puts theball back into play by hitting it tothe nearest player.)

● Use of hands by a player other thana goalie. (The player must stay inthe penalty box one minute.)

● Improper crossing of boundaries.(When a member of the team in pos-session of the ball crosses the boundary line of his zone of play, posses-sion will be awarded to the otherteam.)

Figure 9-6

9-12

Page 160: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Orienteering

Orienteering combines

map reading, compass

use, and terrain study

with strategy,

competition, and

exercise.

Orienteering is a competitive formof land navigation. It combines mapreading, compass use, and terrain studywith strategy, competition, and exer-cise. This makes it an excellent activityfor any training schedule.

An orienteering course is set up byplacing control points or marker signsover a variety of terrain. The orienteeror navigator uses a detailed topogra-phical map and a compass to negotiatethe course. The map should be 1:25,000scale or larger. A liquid-filled orien-teering compass works best. The baseof the compass is transparent plastic,and it gives accurate readings on therun. The standard military, lensaticcompass will work even though it is notspecifically designed for the sport.

The best terrain for an orienteeringcourse is woodland that offers variedterrain. Several different courses canbe setup in an area 2,000 to 4,000 yardssquare. Courses can be short andsimple for training beginners or longerand more difficult to challenge theadvanced competitors.

The various types of orienteeringare described below.

CROSS-COUNTRY ORIENTEERING

This popular type of orienteering isused in all international and champi-onship events. Participants navigate toa set number of check or control pointsin a designated order. Speed is impor-tant since the winner is the one whoreaches all the control points in theright order and returns to the finisharea in the least time.

SCORE ORIENTEERING

Quick thinking and strategy aremajor factors in score orienteering. Acompetitor selects the check-points tofind based on point value and location.Point values throughout the course arehigh or low depending on how hard the

markers are to reach. Whoever collectsthe most points within a designatedtime is the winner. Points are de-ducted for returning late to the finisharea.

LINE ORIENTEERING

Line orienteering is excellent fortraining new orienteers. The route ispremarked on the map, but check-points are not shown. The navagatortries to walk or run the exact maproute. While negotiating the course, helooks for checkpoints or control-markersigns. The winner is determined bythe time taken to run the course andthe accuracy of marking the controlpoints when they are found.

ROUTE ORIENTEERING

This variation is also excellent forbeginners. The navigator follows aroute that is clearly marked with signsor streamers. While negotiating thecourse, he records on the map theroute being taken. Speed and accuracyof marking the route determine thewinner.

NIGHT ORIENTEERING

Competitors in this event carryflashlights and navigate with map andcompass. The night course for cross-country orienteering is usually shorterthan the day course. Control points aremarked with reflective material or dimlights. Open, rolling terrain, which ispoor for day courses, is much morechallenging at night.

URBAN ORIENTEERING

Urban orienteering is very similarto traditional types, but a compass,topographical map, and navigation skillsare not needed. A course can be set upon any installation by using a map ofthe main post or cantonment area.Soldiers run within this area looking

9-13

Page 161: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

for coded location markers, which arenumbered and marked on the mapbefore the start. This eliminates theneed for a compass. Soldiers only needa combination map-scorecard, a watch,and a pencil. (Figure 9-7 shows asample scorecard.)

Urban orienteering adds varietyand competition to a unit’s PT pro-gram and is well suited for an intra-mural program. It also provides a goodcardiovascular workout.

Participants and Rules

Urban orienteering is conductedduring daylight hours to ensure safetyand make the identification of check-point markers easy. Soldiers form two-man teams based on their APFT 2-mile-run times. Team members shouldhave similar running ability. A handi-cap is given to slower teams. (See Fig-ure 9-8.) At the assembly area, eachteam gets identical maps that show the

Figure 9-7

9-14

Page 162: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

location of markers on the course.Location markers are color-coded onthe map based on their point value.The markers farthest from the assem-bly area have the highest point values.The maps are labeled with a locationnumber corresponding to the locationmarker on the course. A time limit isgiven, and teams finishing late arepenalized. Five points are deductedfor each minute a team is late. Whileon the course, team members must staytogether and not separate to get twomarkers at once. A team that separatesis disqualified. Any number of sol-diers may participate, the limiting fac-tors being space and the number ofpoints on the course.

Playing the Game

Once the soldiers have been as-signed a partner, the orienteeringmarshal briefs them on the rules andobjectives of the game. He gives themtheir time limitations and a reminderabout the overtime penalty. He alsogives each team a combination map/scorecard with a two-digit number onit to identify their team. When a teamreaches a location marker, it recordson the scorecard the letters that corre-spond to its two-digit number.

Point values of each location markerare also annotated on the scorecard.When the orienteering marshal signalsthe start of the event, all competitors

Figure 9-8

9-15

Page 163: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 9-9

leave the assembly area at the sametime. One to two hours is the optimaltime for conducting the activity. Asample location marker is shown atFigure 9-9.

For this example, team number 54found the marker. The letters corre-sponding to 54 are LD, so they place“LD” on line 39 of their scorecard.This line number corresponds to thelocation’s marker number. When thelocation marker code is deciphered,the team moves on to the next markerof its choice. Each team goes to asmany markers as possible within theallotted time. After all teams havefound as many location markers aspossible and have turned in their map/scorecards, the points are computed bythe orienteering marshal to determinethe teams’ standings. He has the keyto all the points and can determineeach team’s accuracy. Handicap pointsare then added. Each soldier getspoints if his 2-mile-run time is slowerthan 12 minutes. (See Figure 9-8.)The teams’ standings are displayedshortly after the activity ends.

Safety Briefing

The orienteering marshal gives asafety briefing before the event starts.He reminds soldiers to be cautious

while running across streets and toemphasize that team members shouldalways stay together.

Set Up and Materials

The course must be well thought outand set up in advance. Setting uprequires some man-hours, but the coursecan be used many times. The majortasks are making and installing locationmarkers and preparing map/scorecardcombinations. Once the location markernumbers are marked and color codedon the maps, they are covered withcombat acetate to keep them useful fora long time. Combat acetate (alsocalled plastic sheet) can be purchasedin the self-service supply center storeunder stock number 9330-00-618-7214.

The course organizer must decidehow many location markers to makeand where to put them. He should usecreativity to add excitement to thecourse. Suggestions for locations to putpoint markers are as follows: at inter-sections, along roads in the tree line, onbuilding corners, and along creek bedsand trails. They should not be too hardto find. To help teams negotiate thecourse, all maps must be preciselymarked to correspond with the place-ment of the course-location markers.

9-16

Page 164: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Unit Olympics

The unit olympics is a multifacetedevent that can be tailored to any unit toprovide athletic participation for allsoldiers. The objective is to incorpo-

Unit olympics rate into a team-level competitionincorporate athletic athletic. events that represent all five

events that represent all fitness components. The competitionfive fitness components. can be within a unit or between com-

peting units. When conducted with en-thusiasm, it promotes team spirit andprovides a good workout. It is a gooddiversion from the regular PT session.

A unit olympics, if well promotedfrom the top and well staged by theproject NCO or officer, can be a goodprecursor to an SDT or the EIB test.

TYPES OF EVENTS

The olympics should include eventsthat challenge the soldiers’ muscularstrength and endurance, aerobic en-durance, flexibility, agility, speed, andrelated sports skills.

Events can be held for both indi-viduals and teams, and they should bedesigned so that both male and femalesoldiers can take part. Each soldiershould be required to do a minimumnumber of events. Teams should weara distinctively marked item such as aT-shirt or arm band. This adds char-acter to the event and sets teams apartfrom each other. A warm-up shouldprecede and a cool-down should followthe events.

The following are examples of ath-letic events that could be included in aunit olympics:

Push-Up Derby

This is a timed event using four-member teams. The objective is for theteam to do as many correct push-ups aspossible within a four-minute timelimit. Only one team member doespush-ups at a time. The four teammembers may rotate as often as de-sired,

Sandbag Relay

This event uses four-man teams fora running relay around a quarter-miletrack carrying sandbags. One playerfrom each team lines up at the startingline with a full sandbag in each hand.He hands the sandbags off to a team-mate when he finishes his part of therace. This continues until the last teamplayer crosses the finish line. Placingsare determined by the teams’ order offinish.

Team Flexibility

In this event, if teams are numeri-cally equal, all members of each teamshould participate. If not, as manyteam members should participate aspossible. Each team’s anchor personplaces his foot against a wall or a curb.He stretches his other foot as far awayas possible as in doing a split. The nextteam member puts one foot against theanchor man’s extended foot and does asplit-stretch. This goes on until allteam members are stretched. Theycover as much distance as possiblekeeping in contact with each other.The team that stretches farthest fromthe start point without a break in theirchain is the winner.

Medicine-Ball Throw

This event uses four-member teams.The teams begin by throwing the ballfrom the same starting line. When itlands, the ball is marked for each teamthrower, and the next team playerthrows from this spot. This is repeateduntil all the team’s players have thrown.The team whose combined throwscover the most distance is the winner.

Job-Related Events

The organizer should use his imagi-nation when planning activities. Hemay incorporate soldier skills requiredof an MOS. For instance, he could

9-17

Page 165: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

devise a timed land-navigation eventgeared toward soldiers with an MOS of11 C. The team would carry an 81 -mmmortar (tube, tripod, and baseplate) tothree different locations, each a mileapart, and set it up in a firing configu-ration. This type of event is excellentfor fine-tuning job skills and is alsophysically challenging.

OPENING CEREMONY

The commander, ranking person,or ceremony host gives an inspira-tional speech before the opening cere-monies, welcoming competitors andwishing them good luck. The olympicsis officially opened with a torch light-ing. This is followed by a shortsymbolic parade of all the teams. Theteams are then put back into forma-tion, and team captains lead motivat-ing chants. The master of ceremonies

(MC) announces the sequence of eventsand rules for each event. The gamesthen begin.

JUDGING AND SCORING

The MC should have one assistantper team who will judge that one teamduring each event. Assistants giveinput on events that need a numericalcount. The MC monitors the pointaccumulation of each team. Points areawarded for each event as follows:• First = 4 points.• Second = 3 points.• Third = 2 points.• Fourth = 1 point.

When two teams tie an event, thepoints are added together and splitequally between them. After thecompetition ends, the totaled pointscores for each team are figured. Thefirst- through fourth-place teams arethen recognized.

9-18

Page 166: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Commanders must

develop prgrams that

train soldiers to

maximize their physical

performance.

The goal of the Army’s physicalfitness program is to improve eachsoldier’s physical ability so he cansurvive and win on the battlefield.Physical fitness includes all aspects ofphysical performance, not just per-formance on the APFT. Leaders mustunderstand the principles of exercise,the FITT factors, and know how toapply them in order to develop a soundPT program that will improve all thefitness components. To plan PT suc-cessfully, the commander and MFTmust know the training managementsystem. (See FM 25-100.)

Commanders should not be satisfiedwith merely meeting the minimumrequirements for physical training whichis having all of their soldiers pass theAPFT. They must develop programsthat train soldiers to maximize theirphysical performance. Leaders shoulduse incentives. More importantly, theymust set the example through their ownparticipation.

The unit PT program is the com-mander’s program. It must reflect hisgoals and be based on sound, scientificprinciples. The wise commander alsouses his PT program as a basis forbuilding team spirit and for enhancingother training activities. Tough, real-istic training is good. However, leadersmust be aware of the risks involvedwith physical training and related ac-tivities. They should, therefore, planwisely to minimize injuries and acci-dents.

Steps in Planning

STEP 1: ANALYZE THE MISSION

When planning a physical fitnessprogram, the commander must con-sider the type of unit and its mission.Missions vary as do the physical re-quirements necessary to complete them.As stated in FM 25-100, “The wartimemission drives training.” A careful

analysis of the mission, coupled withthe commander’s intent, yields themission-essential task list (METL) aunit must perform.

Regardless of the unit’s size ormission, reasonable goals are essential.According to FM 25-100, the goalsshould provide a common directionfor all the commander’s programs andsystems. An example of a goal is asfollows because the exceptional physi-cal fitness of the soldier is a criticalcombat-multiplier in the division, itmust be our goal to ensure that oursoldiers are capable of roadmarching12 miles with a 50-pound load in lessthan three hours.

STEP 2: DEVELOP FITNESSOBJECTIVES

Objectives direct the unit’s effortsby prescribing specific actions. Thecommander, as tactician, and the MFT,as physical fitness advisor, must ana-lyze the METL and equate this tospecific fitness objectives. Examplesof fitness objectives are the following:● Improve the unit’s overall level of

strength by ensuring that all sol-diers in the unit can correctly per-form at least one repetition with 50percent of their bodyweight on theoverhead press using a barbell.

● Improve the unit’s average APFTscore through each soldier obtain-ing a minimum score of 80 pointson the push-up and sit-up eventsand 70 points on the 2-mile run.

● Decrease the number of physicaltraining injuries by 25 percentthrough properly conducted train-ing.The commander and MFT identify

and prioritize the objectives.

STEP 3: ASSESS THE UNIT

With the training objectives estab-lished, the commander and MFT areready to find the unit’s current fitnesslevel and measure it against the desiredlevel.

10-1

Page 167: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Giving a diagnostic APFT is oneway to find the current level. Anotherway is to have the soldiers road marcha certain distance within a set timewhile carrying a specified load. Anyquantifiable, physically demanding,mission-essential task can be used as anassessment tool. Training records andreports, as well as any previousARTEP, EDREs, and so forth, can alsoprovide invaluable information.

STEP 4: DETERMINE TRAININGREQUIREMENTS

By possessing the unit’s fitness capa-bilities and comparing them to thestandards defined in training objec-tives, leaders can determine fitnesstraining requirements. When, afterextensive training, soldiers cannot reachthe desired levels of fitness, trainingrequirements may be too idealistic.Once training requirements are deter-mined, the commander reviews higherheadquarters’ long- and short-rangetraining plans to identify training eventsand allocations of resources which willaffect near-term planning.

STEP 5: DEVELOP FITNESS TASKS

Fitness tasks provide the frameworkfor accomplishing all training require-ments. They identify what has to bedone to correct all deficiencies andsustain all proficiencies. Fitness tasksestablish priorities, frequencies, andthe sequence for training requirements.They must be adjusted for real worldconstraints before they become a partof the training plan. The essentialelements of fitness tasks can be cata-loged into four groups:(1) Collective tasks(2) Individual tasks(3) Leader tasks(4) Resources required for training

Collective tasks. Collective tasks arethe training activities performed bythe unit. They are keyed to the unit’sspecific fitness objectives. An ex-ample would be to conduct training todevelop strength and muscular endur-ance utilizing a sandbag circuit.Individual tasks. Individual tasks areactivities that an individual soldiermust do to accomplish the collectivetraining task. For example, to improveCR endurance the individual soldiermust do ability-group running, roadmarching, Fartlek training, intervaltraining, and calculate/monitor hisTHR when appropriate.Leader tasks. Leader tasks are thespecific tasks leaders must do in orderfor collective and individual trainingto take place. These will involve pro-curing resources, the setting up oftraining, education of individual sol-diers, and the supervision of the actualtraining.Resources. Identifying the necessaryequipment, facilities, and training aidsduring the planning phase gives thetrainer ample time to prepare for thetraining. The early identification andacquisition of resources is necessary tofully implement the training program.The bottom line is that training pro-grams must be developed using re-sources which are available.

STEP 6: DEVELOP A TRAININGSCHEDULE

The fitness training schedule re-sults from leaders’ near-term plan-ning. Leaders must emphasize thedevelopment of all the fitness compo-nents and follow the principles ofexercise and the FITT factors. Thetraining schedule shows the order, in-tensity, and duration of activities forPT. Figure 10-1 illustrates a typicalPT session and its component parts.

10-2

Page 168: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

There are three distinct steps inplanning a unit's daily physical train-ing activities. They are as follows: 1. Determine the minimum frequency of t raining. Ideal ly, i t should in- inc lude th ree ca rd io resp i ra to ry and t h r e e m u s c u l a r c o n d i t i o n i n g s e s - sions each weeks. (See the FITT factors in Chapter 1.) 2. Determine the type of activity. This depends on the specific purpose of the training session. (See Figure 10- 2.) For more information on this t o p i c , s e e C h a p t e r s 1 , 2 , a n d 3 .3. Determine the intensity and time of the selected activity. (See the FITT factors in Chapter 1.) Each activity period should includea warm-up, a workout that developscardiorespiratory f i tness and/or mus-cu la r endurance and s t r eng th , and acool-down. (See Figure 10-1).

At the end of a well-planned andexecuted PT session, all soldiers shouldfeel that they have been physicallystressed. They should also understandthe objective of the training sessionand how it will help them improvetheir fitness levels.

STEP 7: CONDUCT ANDEVALUATE TRAINING

The commander and MFT nowbegin managing and supervising theday-to-day training. They evaluatehow the training is performed bymonitoring its intensity, using THR ormuscle failure, along with the durationof the daily workout.

The key to evaluating training is todetermine if the training being con-ducted will result in improvements inphysical conditioning. If not, thetraining needs revision. Leaders should

Figure 10-1

10-3

Page 169: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 10-2

not be sidetracked by PT that is all intervals. Local “Fit to Win” coordina-form and little substance. Such train-ing defeats the concept of objective-based training and results in littlebenefit to soldiers.

Education

Teaching soldiers about physicalfitness is vital. It must be an ongoingeffort that uses trained experts likeMFTs. Soldiers must understand whythe program is organized the way it isand what the basic fitness principlesare. When they know why they aretraining in a certain way, they aremore likely to wholeheartedly takepart. This makes the training more ef-fective.

Education also helps the Armydevelop its total fitness concept. To-tal fitness should be reinforced through-out each soldier’s career. Classroominstruction in subjects such as prin-ciples of exercise, diet and nutrition,tobacco cessation, and stress manage-ment should be held at regular

tors (AR 600-63) can help developclasses on such subjects.

Common Errors

There are some common errors inunit programs. The most commonerror concerns the use of unit runs.When all soldiers must run at the samepace as with a unit run, many do notreceive a training effect because theydo not reach their training heart rate(THR). The least-fit soldiers of theunit may be at risk because they maybe training at heart rates above theirTHR. Another error is exclusivelyusing activities such as the “daily dozen.”These exercises emphasize form oversubstance and do little to improvefitness.

Yet another error is failing to strikea balance in a PT program between CRendurance training and muscular en-durance and strength training. Inaddition, imbalances often stem from alack of variety in the program which

Total fitness should be reinforced throughout each soldier's career by classroom instruction.

10-4

Page 170: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

leads to boredom. The principles ofexercise are described in Chapter 1,and their application is shown in thesample program below.

A Sample Program

The following sample program showsa commander’s thought processes as hedevelops a 12-week fitness trainingprogram for his unit.

Captain Frank Jones’s company hasjust returned from the field where itcompleted an ARTEP. Several injuriesoccurred including a broken foot, re-sulting from a dropped container, andthree low back strains. After evaluat-ing his unit during this ARTEP, CPTJones concluded that its level of physi-cal fitness was inadequate. He thoughtthis contributed to the injuries andpoor performance. The soldiers’ flexi-bility was poor, and there was anapparent lack of prior emphasis on,and training in, good lifting tech-niques. This, combined with poorflexibility in the low back and ham-strings, may have contributed to theunacceptably high number of low backstrains. Captain Jones decided to askthe battalion’s MFT to help himvelop a good unit program forcompany. They went throughfollowing steps.

7-STEP PLANNING PROCESS

ANALYZE THE MISSION

DEVELOP FITNESS OBJECTIVES

ASSESS THE UNIT

DETERMINE TRAINING REQUIREMENTS

DESIGN FITNESS TASKS

DEVELOP A TRAINING SCHEDULE

CONDUCT AND EVALUATE TRAINING

ANALYZE THE MISSION

de-thethe

ARTEP manual to find the most physi-cally demanding, mission-oriented tasksthe unit performs. The analysis showedthat, typically, the company does atactical road march and then occupiesa position. It establishes a perimeter,improves its positions, and selects andprepares alternate positions. One ofthe most demanding missions while inposition requires soldiers to move byhand, for 15 to 30 minutes, equipmentweighing up to 95 pounds. If his unitreceived artillery fire, it would need tobe able to move to alternate positionsas quickly as possible. This requiresmuch lifting, digging, loading, un-loading, and moving of heavy equip-ment. All of these tasks require goodmuscular endurance and strength anda reasonable level of cardiorespiratoryendurance.

DEVELOP FITNESS OBJECTIVES

Next, CPT Jones reviewed his bat-talion commander’s physical trainingguidance. It showed that the com-mander was aware that the unit’s tasksrequire muscular endurance andstrength and cardiorespiratory fitness.The guidance and objectives issued areas follows:

a. Units will do PT five days a week(0600-0700) when in garrison. In thefield, organized PT will beat the com-mander’s discretion.

Captain Jones determined that themajor PT emphasis should be to im-prove muscular endurance and strength.He based this on his unit’s mission,training schedule, available resources,and on his commander’s guidance andobjectives. With this information andthe MIT’s recommendations, CPT Jonesdeveloped the following fitness objec-tives.●

Improve the unit’s overall level ofmuscular endurance and strength.Improve the unit’s overall level offlexibility.Improve the unit’s average APFTscore. Each soldier will score atleast 80 points on the push-up and

First, they analyzed the recentlycompleted ARTEP and reviewed the

1 0 - 5

Page 171: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

sit-up events and 70 points on the2-mile run.

● Improve the unit’s road marchingcapability so that 100 percent of theunit can complete a 12-mile roadmarch with a 35-pound load in atleast 3.5 hours.

● Decrease the number of profiles.● Reduce tobacco use.

ASSESS THE UNIT

The next step CPT Jones accom-plished was to assess his unit.

The MFT studied the results of theunit’s latest APFT and came up withthe following information:● The average push-up score was 68

points.● The average sit-up score was 72

points.● The average number of points scored

on the 2-mile run was 74.● There were six failures, two on the

2-mile run and four on the push-up.The MFT also recommended that

the unit be assessed in the followingareas: road march performance,strength, flexibility, substance abuse,and profiled soldiers.

Following the MFT’s recommenda-tions, subordinate leaders made thefollowing assessments/determinations:● Eighty-eight percent of the com-

pany finished the 12-mile roadmarch with a 35-pound load inunder 3 hours 30 minutes.

● A formation toe-touch test revealedthat over half the company couldnot touch their toes while theirknees were extended.

● Thirty percent of the unit uses to-bacco.

● Two soldiers are in the overweightprogram.

● Eight percent of the unit is now ontemporary profile, most from backproblems.

DETERMINE TRAININGREQUIREMENTS

The next step CPT Jones accom-plished was to determine the trainingrequirements.

Training requirements are deter-mined by analyzing the training resultsand the data obtained from the unit as-sessment. The next step is to comparethis data to the standards identified inthe training objectives. When per-formance is less than the establishedstandard, the problem must be ad-dressed and corrected.

Captain Jones established the fol-lowing training requirements.

Units will do flexibility exercisesduring the warm-up and cool-downphase of every PT session. During thecool-down, emphasis on will be placedon developing flexibility in the lowback, hamstrings, and hip extensormuscle groups.

Each soldier will do 8 to 12 repeti-tions of bent-leg, sandbag dead-lifts atleast two times a week to developstrength. The section leader will su-pervise lifts.

Each soldier will do heavy resis-tance/weight training for all the musclegroups of the body two to three timesa week.

Each soldier will perform timed setsof push-ups and sit-ups.

Each soldier will train at least 20 to30 minutes at THR two to three timesa week.

Road marches will be conducted atleast once every other week.

Tobacco cessation classes will be es-tablished to reduce the number oftobacco users.

DESIGN FITNESS TASKS

Once all training requirements areidentified, the next step is to use themto design fitness tasks which relate to

10-6

Page 172: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

the fitness objectives. In developingthe fitness tasks, CPT Jones mustaddress collective, individual, and leadertasks as well as resources required.

Fitness tasks provide the frameworkfor accomplishing the training require-ments. By accurately listing the fitnesstasks that must be done and the re-sources required to do them, the sub-sequent step of developing a trainingschedule is greatly facilitated.

An example of designing fitnesstasks is provided in Figure 10-3 byusing the activities which might occurduring one week of physical training.

The collective tasks for the unit areto perform the following: developmuscular endurance and strength, im-prove CR endurance, and improveflexibility.

The individual tasks all soldiersmust perform during the week are asfollows. For developing strength andmuscular endurance, they must per-form appropriate strength circuit exer-cises, PREs, sandbag circuits, to in-clude performing bent-leg dead liftsexercises, and training for push-up/sit-up improvement. To improvecardiorespiratory endurance, they must

do ability-group runs, interval train-ing, road marching, and they must cal-culate their THR and monitor THRwhen appropriate. To improve theirflexibility, they must do stretching ex-ercises during their daily warm-upand cool-down.

The leader’s tasks are to organizeand supervise all strength- and muscleendurance-training sessions and CRtraining sessions so as to best meet allrelated fitness objectives. Similarly,the leader must organize and superviseall warm-up and cool-down sessionsto best meet the fitness objectives forthe development and maintenance offlexibility.

To provide specific examples ofleaders tasks in the area of training forstrength and muscle endurance, theleader will ensure the following:● Each strength- and/or muscle en-

durance-training session works allthe major muscle groups of thebody.

● High priority is given to trainingthose muscles and muscle groupsused in mission-essential tasks.

● Areas where weaknesses exist,with respect to strength/muscle

Figure 10-3

10-7

Page 173: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

endurance, are targeted in all work- chapters are used to organize trainingouts. sessions for improving CR endurance●

Problem areas related to APFT per- and flexibility.formance are addressed in appro- The resources needed for the one-priate workouts. week period are as follows: a strengthThe duration of each strength train- room, a gym, a PT field, a runninging session is 20-40 minutes. track and/or running trails, and sand-Soldiers train to muscle failure. bags.All the principles of exercise, toinclude regularity, overload, re- DEVELOP A TRAINING SCHEDULEcovery, progression, specificity, bal-ance are used. The next step was to develop aIn a similar manner, the leader fitness training schedule (shown at

would ensure that the guidelines and Figure 10-4). It lists the daily activi-principles outlined in this and earlier ties and their intensity and duration.

Figure 10-4

1 0 - 8

Page 174: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 10-4 (continued)

10-9

Page 175: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 10-4 (continued)

10-10

Page 176: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 10-4 (continued)

10-11

Page 177: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

CONDUCT AND EVALUATETRAINING

Conducting and evaluating trainingis the final phase of the trainingprocess. This phase includes the evalu-ation of performance, assessment ofcapabilities, and feedback portions ofthe training management cycle. Theseportions of the cycle must be simulta-neous and continuous. To be effec-tive, the evaluation process must ad-dress why weaknesses exist, and itmust identify corrective actions to betaken. Evaluations should address thefollowing:● Assessment of proficiency in mis-

sion-essential tasks.● Status of training goals and objec-

tives.● Status of training in critical indi-

vidual and collective tasks.● Shortfalls in training.● Recommendations for next training

cycle (key in on correcting weak-nesses).

● Results of educational programs.

Using the Principles ofExercise

As CPT Jones developed his pro-gram, he made sure he used the sevenprinciples of exercise. He justified hisprogram as follows:● Balance. This program is balanced

because all the fitness componentsare addressed. The emphasis is onbuilding muscular endurance andstrength in the skeletal muscularsystem because of the many liftingtasks the unit must do. The pro-gram also trains cardiorespiratoryendurance and flexibility, and warm-up and cool-down periods are in-cluded in every workout.

● Specificity. The unit’s fitness goalsare met. The sand-bag lifting andweight training programs helpdevelop muscular endurance andstrength. The movements should,when possible, stress muscle groups

used in their job-related lifting tasks.Developmental stretching should helpreduce work-related back injuries. Thedifferent types of training in runningwill help ensure that soldiers reach asatisfactory level of CR fitness andhelp each soldier score at least 70points on the APFT’s 2-mile run.Soldiers do push-ups and sit-ups atleast two or three times a week toimprove the unit’s performance inthese events. The competitive fitnessactivities will help foster teamworkand cohesion, both of which are essen-tial to each section’s functions.● Overload. Soldiers reach overload

in the weight circuit by doing eachexercise with an 8- to 12-RM liftfor a set time and/or until theyreach temporary muscle failure. Forthe cardiorespiratory workout, THRis calculated initially using 70 per-cent of the HRR. They do push-upsand sit-ups in multiple, timed setswith short recovery periods to en-sure that muscle failure is reached.They also do PREs to muscle fail-ure.

● Progression. To help soldiers reachadequate overload as they improve,the program is made gradually moredifficult. Soldiers progress in theirCR workout by increasing the timethey spend at THR up to 30 to 45minutes per session and by main-taining THR. They progress on theweight training circuit individually.When a soldier can do an exercisefor a set time without reachingmuscle failure, the weight is in-creased so that the soldier reachesmuscle failure between the 8th and12th repetition again. Progressionin push-ups and sit-ups involvesslowly increasing the duration ofthe work intervals.

● Variety. There are many differentactivities for variety. For strengthand muscular endurance trainingthe soldiers use weight circuits,sandbag circuits, and PREs. Abilitygroup runs, intervals, Par courses,

10-12

Page 178: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Fartlek running, and guerrilla drills areall used for CR training. Variedstretching techniques, including static,partner-assisted, and contract-relax,are used for developmental stretching.● Regularity. Each component of

fitness is worked regularly. Soldierswill spend at least two to three daysa week working each of the majorfitness components. They will alsodo push-ups and sit-ups regularly tohelp reach their peak performanceon the APFT.

● Recovery. The muscular and cardi-orespiratory systems are stressed inalternate workouts. This allows one

system to recover on the day theother is working hard.

Conclusion

CPT Jones’s step-by-step processof developing a sound PT program forhis unit is an example of what eachcommander should do in developinghis own unit program.

Good physical training takes nomore time to plan and execute thandoes poor training. When commandersuse a systematic approach to developtraining, the planning process bearssound results and the training willsucceed.

10-13

Page 179: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Soldiers report to initial entry train-ing (IET) ranging widely in their levelsof physical fitness. Because of this,there are special considerations whendesigning a physical training programfor IET soldiers. Physical traininginvolves safely training and challeng-ing all soldiers while improving theirfitness level to meet required stan-dards. The regulations which governthe conduct of physical training in IETand explain the graduation require-ments are TRADOC Reg. 350-6 andAR 350-15.

The mission of physical training inIET is twofold: to safely train soldiersto meet the graduation requirementsof each course and to prepare soldiersto meet the physical demands of theirfuture assignments.

Program Development

All physical training programs inIET must do the following: 1 ) progres-sively condition and toughen soldiersfor military duties; 2) develop soldiers’self-confidence, discipline, and teamspirit; 3) develop healthy life-stylesthrough education; and, 4) improvephysical fitness to the highest levelspossible in all five components ofphysical fitness (cardiorespiratoryendurance, muscular strength, muscu-lar endurance, flexibility, and bodycomposition).

Because each IET school is some-what different, commanders mustexamine the graduation requirementsfor the course and establish appropri-ate fitness objectives. They can thendesign a program that attains these ob-jectives. The seven principles ofexercise outlined in Chapter 1 areuniversal, and they apply to all PTprograms including those in IET.Commanders of initial entry trainingshould look beyond the graduation

requirements of their own trainingcourse to ensure that their soldiers areprepared for the physical challengesof their future assignments. Thismeans developing safe training pro-grams which will produce the maxi-mum physical improvement possible.

MFTs are skilled at assessing sol-diers’ capabilities. They use the fivecomponents of physical fitness in de-signing programs to reach the trainingobjectives established by the com-mander. They also know how toconduct exercise programs that areeffective and safe. MFTs are not,however, trained to diagnose or treatinjuries.

The commander’s latitude in pro-gram development varies with thelength and type of the IET course.For example, commanders of basiccombat training (BCT) may do astandard PT program at one installa-tion, while AIT commanders maydesign their own programs. Regard-less of the type of course, all leadersmust strive to train their soldiers toattain the highest level of physicalfitness possible. This means using theestablished principles of exercise todevelop a safe physical training pro-gram.

Safety Considerations

Overuse injuries are common inIET. However, they can be avoided bycarefully following the exercise prin-ciples of “recovery” and “progression.”

Research suggests that soldiers aremore prone to injuries of the lowerextremities after the third week ofIET. High-impact activities, such asroad marching and running on hardsurfaces, should be carefully moni-tored during at this time. During thisperiod, fixed circuits and other activi-ties that develop CR fitness are good,low-impact alternatives.

Properly fitted, high-quality run-ning shoes are important, especiallywhen PT sessions require runningon hard surfaces. Court shoes, likebasketball or tennis shoes, are not

11-0

Page 180: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

designed to absorb the repetitive shockof running. Activities such as runningobstacle courses and road marchingrequire combat boots to protect andsupport the feet and ankles. Naturally,common sense dictates a reasonablebreak-in period for new combat boots,especially before long marches.

Examples of recommended PT ses-sions and low-risk exercises are inChapter 7. Specific health and safetyconsiderations are in TRADOC Reg.350-6, paragraph 4-2.

Road Marching

One road march should be con-ducted weekly with the difficulty ofthe marches progressing graduallythroughout IET.

In the first two weeks of IET,

up to 5 kilometers with light loads.Loads should be restricted to thestandard LCE, kevlar helmet, andweapon. Bones, ligaments, and ten-dons respond slowly to training andmay be injured if the load and/orduration are increased too quickly.

After the initial adaptations in theearly weeks of IET, soldiers can beexpected to carry progressively heav-ier loads including a rucksack. By hestart of the fourth week, they shouldbe accustomed to marching in boots,and their feet should be less prone toblistering. By the sixth week, the loadmay be increased to 40 pounds includ-ing personal clothing and equipment.At no time during IET or one-stationunit training (OSUT) should loads ex-ceed 40 pounds.

A sample regimen for road marchessoldiers can be expected to road march during IET is at Figure 11-1.

Figure 11-1

11-1

Page 181: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

In today’s Army, soldiers may deployanywhere in the world. They may gointo the tropical heat of CentralAmerica, the deserts of the MiddleEast, the frozen tundra of Alaska, orthe rolling hills of Western Europe.Each environment presents uniqueproblems concerning soldiers’ physicalperformance. Furthermore, physicalexertion in extreme environments canbe life-threatening. While recogniz-ing such problems is important, pre-venting them is even more important.This requires an understanding of theenvironmental factors which affectphysical performance and how thebody responds to those factors.

Temperature Regulation

The body constantly produces heat,especially during exercise. To main-tain a constant normal temperature, itmust pass this heat on to the environ-ment. Life-threatening circumstancescan develop if the body becomes toohot or too cold. Body temperaturemust be maintained within fairly nar-row limits, usually between 74 and 110degrees Fahrenheit. However, hy-pothermia and heat injuries can occurwithin much narrower limits. There-fore, extreme temperatures can have adevastating effect on the body’s abilityto control its temperature.

Overheating is a serious threat tohealth and physical performance.During exercise, the body can produceheat at a rate 10 to 20 times greaterthan during rest. To survive, it mustget rid of the excess heat.

The four ways in which the bodycan gain or lose heat are the following:• Conduction-the transfre of heat from a warm object to a cool one that is touching it. (Warming boots by putting them on is an example.) • Convection-the transfer of heat by c i r cu la t ion o r movement of air. (Using a fan on a hot day is an example.) • Radiation-the transfer of heat by electromagnetic waves. (Sitting un- der a heat lamp is an example.)• Evaporation- the transfer of heat by changing a liquid into a gas. (Evaporating sweat cooling the skin is an example.)

Heat moves from warm to coolareas. During exercise, when the bodyis extremely warm, heat can be lost bya combination of the four methods.Sweating, however, is the body’s mostimportant means for heat loss, espe-cially during exercise. Any conditionthat slows or blocks the transfer of heatfrom the body by evaporation causesheat storage which results in an in-crease in body temperature.

The degree to which evaporativecooling occurs is also directly related tothe air’s relative humidity (a measureof the amount of water vapor in theair). When the relative humidity is 100percent, the air is completely saturatedat its temperature. No more water canevaporate into the surrounding air. Asa result, sweat does not evaporate, nocooling effect takes place, and thebody temperature increases. This causeseven more sweating. During exercisein the heat, sweat rates of up to twoquarts per hour are not uncommon.

12-0

Page 182: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

If the lost fluids are not replaced, de-hydration can occur. This condition,in turn, can result in severe heatinjuries.

Thus, in hot, humid conditions whena soldier’s sweat cannot evaporate,there is no cooling effect through theprocess of evaporation. High relativehumidities combined with high tem-peratures can cause serious problems.Weather of this type occurs in thetropics and equatorial regions such asCentral America and southern Asia.These are places where soldiers havebeen or could be deployed.

To prevent heat injuries, the fol-lowing hydration guidelines should beused: ● Type of drink: cool water (45 to 55 degrees F). ● Before the activity: drink 13 to 20 ounces at least 30 minutes before. ● During the activity: drink 3 to 6 ounces at 15 to 30 minute intervals. ● After the activity: drink to satisfy thirst, then drink a little more.

Heat Injuries and Symptoms

The following are common types ofheat injuries and their symptoms.● Heat cramps-muscles cramps of the abdomen, legs, or arms. ● Heat exhaustion-headache, exces- sive sweating, dizziness, nausea, clammy skin. ● Heat stroke-hot, dry skin, cessa- tion of sweating, rapid pulse, men- tal confusion, unconsciousness.

Adapting to differing

environmental conditions

is called acclimatization.

To prevent heat injuries while exer-cising, trainers must adjust the inten-sity to fit the temperature and humid-ity. They must ensure that soldiersdrink enough water before and duringthe exercise session. Body weight is agood gauge of hydration. If rapidweight loss occurs, dehydration shouldbe suspected. Plain water is the bestreplacement fluid to use. Highly con-centrated liquids such as soft drinksand those with a high sugar contentmay hurt the soldier’s performancebecause they slow the absorption ofwater from the stomach.

Acclimatization to Hot, HumidEnvironments

Adapting to differing environmentalconditions is called acclimatization.Soldiers who are newly introduced toa hot, humid climate and are moder-ately active in it can acclimatize in 8 to14 days. Soldiers who are sedentarytake much longer. Until they are ac-climatized, soldiers are much morelikely to develop heat injuries.

A soldier’s ability to perform ef-fectively in hot, humid conditionsdepends on both his acclimatizationand level of fitness. The degree ofheat stress directly depends on therelative workload. When two soldiersdo the same task, the heat stress is lessfor the soldier who is in better physicalcondition, and his performance is likelyto be better. Therefore, it is importantto maintain high levels of fitness.

Increased temperatures and humid-ity cause increased heart rates. Con-sequently, it takes much less effort toelevate the heart rate into the trainingzone, but the training effect is thesame. These facts underscore the needto use combat-development running

12-1

Page 183: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

and to monitor heart rates when run-ning, especially in hot, humid condi-tions.

Some important changes occur as aresult of acclimatization to a hot cli-mate. The following physical adapta-tions help the body cope with a hotenvironment●

Sweating occurs at a lower bodytemperature.Sweat production is increased.Blood volume is increased.Heart rate is less at any given workrate.

Exercising in ColdEnvironments

Contrary to popular belief, there arefew real dangers in exercising at tem-peratures well below freezing. Sincethe body produces large amounts ofheat during exercise, it has little troublemaintaining a normal temperature.There is no danger of freezing thelungs. However, without proper pre-cautions, hypothermia, frostbite, anddehydration can occur.

HYPOTHERMIA

If the body’s core temperature dropsbelow normal, its ability to regulate itstemperature can become impaired orlost. This condition is called hypother-mia. It develops because the bodycannot produce heat as fast as it is losingit. This can lead to death. The chanceof a soldier becoming hypothermic is amajor threat any time he is exposed tothe cold.

Some symptoms of hypothermia areshivering, loss of judgment, slurredspeech, drowsiness, and muscle weak-ness.

During exercise in the cold, peopleusually produce enough heat to maintainnormal body temperature. As they get

Hypothermia develops when the body cannot produce heat as fast as it is losing it.

fatigued, however, they slow down andtheir bodies produce less heat. Also,people often overdress for exercise inthe cold. This makes the body sweat.The sweat dampens the clothing next tothe skin making it a good conductor ofheat. The combination of decreased heatproduction and increased heat loss cancause a rapid onset of hypothermia.

Some guidelines for dressing for coldweather exercise are shown in Figure12-1.

GUIDELINES FOR DRESSING FOR EXERCISE IN THE COLD

Clothing for cold weather should protect,insulate, and ventilate. 40% HEAT LOSS THROUGH HEAD

t i $J:q(([l’

AND NECK WHEN UNCOVERED =

Protect by covering as large an area ofthe body as possible.Insulation will occur by trapping airwhich has been warmed by the bodyand holding it near the skin.Ventilate by allowing a two-wayexchange of air through the variouslayers of clothing.

LIGHIWEIGHTWARM-UPS

(NOT WATERPROOF)

Clothing should leave your body slightly\cool rather than hot.

i l l

/ “

Clothing should also be loose enough to /allow movement.

Clothing soaked with perspiration shouldFEET SHOULD

be removed if reasonably possible. BE KEPT DRY J ! ! ! !

Figure 12-1

12-2

Page 184: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

FROSTBITE

Frostbite is the freezing of bodytissue. It commonly occurs in bodyparts located away from the core andexposed to the cold such as the nose,ears, feet, hands, and skin. Severecases of frostbite may require amputa-tion.

Factors which lead to frostbite arecold temperatures combined with windyconditions. The wind has a greatcooling effect because it causes rapidconvective heat transfer from the body.For a given temperature, the higher thewind speed, the greater the coolingeffect. Figure 12-2 shows how thewind can affect cooling by providinginformation on windchill factors.

A person’s movement through theair creates an effect similar to that

mph is the same as standing in a 15-mph wind. If, in addition, there is a5-mph headwind, the overall effect isequivalent to a 20-mph wind. There-fore, an exercising soldier must bevery cautious to avoid getting frost-bite. Covering exposed parts of thebody will substantially reduce therisks.

DEHYDRATION

Dehydration can result from losingbody fluids faster than they are re-placed. Cold environments are oftendry, and water may be limited. As aresult, soldiers may in time becomedehydrated. While operating in ex-tremely cold climates, trainers shouldcheck the body weights of the soldiersregularly and encourage them to drink

caused by wind. Riding a bicycle at 15 liquids whenever possible.

Figure 12-2

12-3

Page 185: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Acclimatization to HighAltitudes

Elevations below 5,000 feet havelittle noticeable effect on healthy people.However, at higher elevations theatmospheric pressure is reduced, andthe body tissues get less oxygen. Thismeans that soldiers cannot work orexercise as well at high altitudes. Thelimiting effects of high elevation areoften most pronounced in older sol-diers and persons with low levels offitness.

Due to acclimatization, the longer asoldier remains at high altitude, thebetter his performance becomes.Generally, however, he will not per-form as well as at sea level and shouldnot be expected to. For normal activi-ties, the time required to acclimatizedepends largely on the altitude. Inorder to insure that soldiers who arenewly assigned to altitudes above 5,000feet are not at a disadvantage, it isrecommended that 30 days of acclima-tization, including regular physicalactivity, be permitted before they areadministered a record APFT.

Before acclimatization is complete,people at high altitudes may sufferacute mountain sickness. This in-cludes such symptoms as headache,rapid pulse, nausea, loss of appetite,and an inability to sleep. The primarytreatment is further acclimatization orreturning to a lower altitude.

Once soldiers are acclimatized toaltitudes above 5,000 feet, deacclima-tization will occur if they spend 14 ormore days at lower altitudes. For thisreason, soldiers should be permittedtwice the length of their absence, notto exceed 30 days, to reacclimatizebefore being required to take a recordAPFT. A period of 30 days is adequatefor any given reacclimatization.

Pollutants can irritate the respiratory tract and make the person less able to perform aerobically.

The following are some ways to dealwith air pollution while exercising:• Avoid exposure to pollutants before and during exercise, if possible. • In areas of high ozone concentra- tion, train early in the day and after dark. • Avoid exercising near heavily trav- eled streets and highways during rush hours. • Consult your supporting preven- tive-medicine activity for advice in identifying or defining training restrictions during periods of heavy air pollution.

Air Pollution and Exercise

Pollutants are substances in the en-vironment which lower the environ-

ment’s quality. Originally, air pollut-ants were thought to be only by-products of the industrial revolution.However, many pollutants are pro-duced naturally. For example, volca-noes emit sulfur oxides and ash, andlightning produces ozone.

There are two classifications of airpollutants - primary and secondary.Primary pollutants are produced di-rectly by industrial sources. Theseinclude carbon monoxide (CO), sulfuroxides (SO), hydrocarbons, and par-ticulate (ash). Secondary pollutantsare created by the primary pollutant’sinteraction with the environment. Ex-amples of these include ozone (03),aldehydes, and sulfates. Smog is acombination of primary and secondarypollutants.

Some pollutants have negative ef-fects on the body. For example, car-bon monoxide binds to hemoglobin inthe red blood cells and reduces theamount of oxygen carried in the blood.Ozone and the oxides irritate the airpassageways in the lungs, while otherpollutants irritate the eyes.

When exercisers in high-pollutionareas breathe through the mouth, thenasal mucosa’s ability to remove impu-rities is bypassed, and many pollutantscan be inhaled. This irritates therespiratory tract and makes the personless able to perform aerobically.

12-4

Page 186: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Most injuries can be prevented by designing a well-balanced PT program.

Injuries are not an uncommon oc-currence during intense physical train-ing. It is, nonetheless, a primaryresponsibility of all leaders to mini-mize the risk of injury to soldiers.Safety is always a major concern.

Most injuries can be prevented bydesigning a well-balanced PT programthat does not overstress any body parts,allows enough time for recovery, andincludes a warm-up and cool-down.Using strengthening exercises and soft,level surfaces for stretching and run-ning also helps prevent injuries. If,however, injuries do occur, they shouldbe recognized and properly treated ina timely fashion. If a soldier suspectsthat he is injured, he should stop whathe is doing, report the injury, and seekmedical help.

Many common injuries are causedby overuse, that is, soldiers oftenexercise too much and too often andwith too rapid an increase in the work-load. Most overuse injuries can betreated with rest, ice, compression, andelevation (RICE). Following any re-quired first aid, health-care personnelshould evaluate the injured soldier.

Typical Injuries Associatedwith Physical Training

Common injuries associated withexercise are the following:

Abrasion (strawberry) - the rubbingoff of skin by friction.Dislocation - “the displacement ofone or more bones of a joint fromtheir natural positions.Hot spot - a hot or irritated feelingof the skin which occurs just beforea blister forms. These can be pre-vented by using petroleum jellyover friction-prone areas.Blister - a raised spot on the skinfilled with liquid. These can gener-ally be avoided by applying lubri-cants such as petroleum jelly toareas of friction, keeping footwear

(socks, shoes, boots) in good repair,and wearing the proper size ofboot or shoe.Shinsplints - a painful injury to thesoft tissues and bone in the shinarea. These are generally causedby wearing shoes with inflexiblesoles or inadequate shock absorp-tion, running on the toes or on hardsurfaces, and/or having calf muscleswith a limited range of motion.Sprain - a stretching or tearing ofthe ligament(s) at a joint.Muscle spasm (muscle cramp) - asudden, involuntary contraction ofone or more muscles.Contusion - a bruise with bleedinginto the muscle tissue.Strain - a stretching or tearing ofthe muscles.Bursitis - an inflammation of thebursa (a sack-like structure wheretendons pass over bones). Thisoccurs at a joint and produces painwhen the joint is moved or touched.Sometimes swelling occurs.Tendinitis - an inflammation of atendon that produces pain when theattached muscle contracts. Swellingmay not occur.Stress fractures of the feet.Tibial stress fractures - overuseinjuries which seem like shinsplintsexcept that the pain is in a specificarea.Knee injuries - caused by runningon uneven surfaces or with wornout shoes, overuse, and improperbody alignment. Soldiers who haveproblems with their knees can bene-fit from doing leg exercisesthat strengthen the front (quadri-ceps) and rear (hamstrings) thighmuscles.Low back problems - caused bypoor running, sitting, or liftingtechniques, and by failing to stretchthe back and hip-flexor musclesand to strengthen the abdominalmuscles.The most common running injuries

occur in the feet, ankles, knees, and

13-1

Page 187: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

legs. Although they are hard toeliminate, much can be done to keepthem to a minimum. Preventive meas-ures include proper warm-up and cool-down along with stretching exercises.Failure to allow recovery between hardbouts of running can lead to overtrain-ing and can also be a major cause of in-juries. A well-conditioned soldier canrun five to six times a week. However,to do this safely, he should do twothings: gradually build up to runningthat frequently and vary the intensityof the running sessions to allow recov-ery between them.

Many running injuries can be pre-vented by wearing proper footwear.Soldiers should train in running shoes.These are available in a wide range ofprices and styles. They should fitproperly and have flexible, multi-layered soles with good arch and heelsupport. Shoes made with leather andnylon uppers are usually the mostcomfortable. See Appendix E for moreinformation on running shoes.

Since injuries can also be caused byrunning on hard surfaces, soldiersshould, if possible, avoid running onconcrete. Soft, even surfaces are bestfor injury prevention. Whenever pos-sible, soldiers should run on grasspaths, dirt paths, or park trails. How-ever, with adequate footwear and re-covery periods, running on roads andother hard surfaces should pose noproblem.

Common running injuries includethe following:

Many running injuries can be prevented by wearing proper footwear.

Black toenails.Ingrown toenails.Stress fractures of the feet.Ankle sprains and fractures.Achilles tendinitis (caused by im-proper stretching and shoes that donot fit.

● Upper leg and groin injuries (whichcan usually be prevented by usinggood technique in stretching anddoing strengthening exercises).Tibial stress fractures, knee inju-

ries, low back problems, shinsplints,and blisters, which were mentionedearlier, are also injuries which com-monly occur in runners.

Other Factors

Proper clothing can also help pre-vent injuries. Clothes used for physi-cal activity should be comfortable andfit loosely. A T-shirt or sleevelessundershirt and gym shorts are best inwarm weather. In cold weather, cloth-ing may be layered according to per-sonal preference. For example, sol-diers can wear a BDU, sweat suit,jogging suit, or even Army-issuedlong underwear. In very cold weather,soldiers may need gloves or mittensand ear-protecting caps. Rubberizedor plastic suits should never be wornduring exercise. They cause excessivesweating which can lead to dehydra-tion and a dangerous increase in bodytemperature.

Army Regulation 385-55 (para-graph B- 12, C) prohibits the use ofheadphones or earphones while walk-ing, jogging, skating, or bicycling onthe roads and streets of military instal-lations. However, they may be wornon tracks and running trails.

Road safety equipment is requiredon administative-type walks, marches,or runs which cross highways, roads,or tank trails or which are conductedon traffic ways. If there is reducedvisibility, control personnel must useadded caution to ensure the safety oftheir soldiers.

13-2

Page 188: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

The APFT is a three- e v e n t p h y s i c a l performance test used to a s s e s s m u s c u l a r endurance and cardiorespiratory (CR) fitness .

All soldiers in the Active Army,Army National Guard, and ArmyReserve must take the Army PhysicalFitness Test (APFT) regardless of theirage. The APFT is a three-eventphysical performance test used to as-sess muscular endurance and cardi-orespiratory (CR) fitness. It is a simpleway to measure a soldier’s ability to ef-fectively move his body by using hismajor muscle groups and CR system.Performance on the APFT is stronglylinked to the soldier’s fitness level andhis ability to do fitness-related tasks.An APFT with alternate test events isgiven to soldiers with permanent pro-files and with temporary profiles greaterthan three months’ duration.

While the APFT testing is an impor-tant tool in determining the physicalreadiness of individual soldiers andunits, it should not be the sole basis forthe unit’s physical fitness training.Commanders at every level must en-sure that fitness training is designed todevelop physical abilities in a balancedway, not just to help soldiers do well onthe APFT.

Commanders should use their unit’sAPFT results to evaluate its physicalfitness level. APFT results may indi-cate a need to modify the fitnessprograms to attain higher fitness levels.However, mission-essential tasks, notthe APFT, should drive physical train-ing.

Additional physical performance testsand standards which serve as prerequi-sites for Airborne/Ranger/SpecialForces/SCUBA qualification are pro-

Performance on the APFT is strongly linked to the soldier's fitness level and his ability to do fitness-related tasks.

vided in DA Pam 351-4.

Methods of Evaluation

Commanders are responsible forensuring that their soldiers are physi-cally fit (AR 350- 15). There areseveral ways they can assess fitnessincluding the following● Testing. This is an efficient way

to evaluate both the individual’s

and the unit’s physical performancelevels.Inspection. This evaluates trainingprocedures and indicates the soundness of the unit’s physical fitnessprogram.Observation. This is an ongoingway to review training but is not asreliable as testing as an indicator ofthe unit’s level of fitness.Medical examination. This detectsindividual disabilities, health-re-related problems, and physical prob-lems.

Over-Forty CardiovascularScreening Program

The Army’s over-40 cardiovascularscreening program (CVSP) does thefollowing:●

Identifies soldiers with a risk ofcoronary heart disease.Provides guidelines for safe, regu-lar CR exercise.Gives advice and help in control-ling heart-disease risk factors.Uses treadmill testing only for high-risk soldiers who need it. -

All soldiers, both active and reservecomponent, must take the APFT forrecord regardless of age unless prohib-ited by a medical profile. For soldierswho reached age 40 on or after 1January 1989, there is no requirementfor clearance in the cardiovascularscreening program before taking arecord APFT. Soldiers who reachedage 40 before 1 January 1989 must becleared through the cardiovascularscreening program before taking arecord APFT. Prior to their CVSPevaluation, however, they may stilltake part in physical training to in-clude diagnostic APFTs unless pro-filed or contraindications to exerciseexist. All soldiers must undergo peri-odic physical examinations in accor-dance with AR 40-501 and NGR 40-501. These include screening forcardiovascular risk factors.

14-1

Page 189: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Overview

As stated, APFT events assess mus-cular endurance and CR fitness. Thelowest passing APFT standards reflectthe minimum acceptable fitness levelfor all soldiers, regardless of MOS orcomponent. When applied to a com -mand, APFT results show a unit’soverall level of physical fitness. How-ever, they are not all-inclusive, overallmeasures of physical-combat readi-ness. To assess this, other physicalcapabilities must be measured. TheAPFT does, however, give a com-mander a sound measurement of thegeneral fitness level of his unit.

Service schools, agencies, and unitsmay set performance goals which areabove the minimum APFT standards inaccordance with their missions (AR350- 15). Individual soldiers are alsoencouraged to set for themselves aseries of successively higher APFTperformance goals. They should al-ways strive to improve themselvesphysically and never be content withmeeting minimum standards. Compe-tition on the APFT among soldiers orunits can also be used to motivate themto improve their fitness levels.

Testing is not a substitute for aregular, balanced exercise program.Diagnostic testing is important in moni-toring training progress but, whendone too often, may decrease motiva-tion and waste training time.

The test period is defined as theperiod of time which elapses fromstarting to finishing the three events. Itmust not take more than two hours.Soldiers must do all three events in thesame test period.

Test Administration

The APFT must be administeredproperly and to standard in order toaccurately evaluate a soldier’s physical

fitness and to be fair to all soldiers.(Test results are used for personnelactions.)

Individual soldiers are not author-ized to administer the APFT to them-selves for the purpose of satisfying aunit’s diagnostic or record APFT re-quirement.

REQUIRED EQUIPMENT

The OIC or NCOIC at the test sitemust have a copy of FM 21-20 onhand. The supervisor of each eventmust have the event instructions andstandards. Scorers should have aclipboard and an ink pen to record theresults on the soldiers’ scorecards.

Two stopwatches are needed. Theymust be able to measure time in bothminutes and seconds.

Runners must wear numbers orsome other form of identification forthe 2-mile run. The numbers may bestenciled or pinned onto pullover vestsor sleeveless, mesh pullovers or at-tached to the runners themselves.

Soldiers should wear clothing that isappropriate for PT such as shorts, T-shirts, socks, and running shoes (nottennis shoes). They should not wearbasketball shoes or other types of courtshoes. BDUs may be worn but may bea hindrance on some events.

Anything that gives a soldier anunfair advantage is not permitted duringthe APFT. Wearing devices such asweight belts or elastic bandages may ormay not provide an advantage. How-ever, for standardization, such addi-tional equipment is not authorizedunless prescribed by medical person-nel. The only exception is gloves.They may be worn in cold weatherwhen approved by the local com-mander.

Each soldier needs a DA Form 705,Army Physical Fitness Test Scorecard.The soldier fills in his name, socialsecurity number, grade, age, and sex.

14-2

Page 190: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-3

(See Figure 14-1.) The unit will complete theheight and weight data. Scorers record the raw score for eachevent and initial the results. If a soldier failsan event or finds it difficult to perform, thescorer should write down the reasons and

other pertinent information in the commentblock. After the entire APFT has beencompleted, the event scorer will convert rawscores to point scores using the scoringstandards on the back of the scorecards. (SeeFigure 14-1.)

See page 14-8.1 for instructions on completing DA Form 705.

ARMY PHYSICAL FITNESS TEST SCORECARD

*Figure 14-1

Page 191: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-4

*Figure 14-1 (continued)

Page 192: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-5

*Figure 14-1 (continued)

Page 193: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-6

*Figure 14-1 (continued)

Page 194: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-7

*Figure 14-1 (continued)

Page 195: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-8

SUPERVISION

The APFT must be properlysupervised to ensure that itsobjectives are met. Propersupervision ensures uniformityin the following:• Scoring the test.• Training of supervisors and

scorers.• Preparing the test and

controlling performancefactors.

The goal of the APFT is toget an accurate evaluation of thesoldiers’ fitness levels.Preparations for administeringan accurate APFT include thefollowing:• Selecting and training

supervisors and scorers.• Briefing and orienting

administrators and partici-pants.

• Securing a location for theevents.

Commanders must strictlycontrol those factors whichinfluence test performance.They must ensure that events,scoring, clothing, and equip-ment are uniform. Com-manders should plan testingwhich permits each soldier toperform to his maximal level.They should also ensure thefollowing:• Soldiers are not tested when

fatigued or ill.• Soldiers do not have tiring

duties just before taking theAPFT.

• Weather and environ-mental conditions do notinhibit performance.

• Safety is the first consid-eration.

Duties of Test Personnel

Testers must be totally familiarwith the instructions for each eventand trained to administer the tests.Correctly supervising testees andlaying out the test area are essentialduties. The group administering thetest must include the following:• OIC or NCOIC.• Event supervisor, scorers, and a

demonstrator for each event.• Support personnel (safety,

control, and medical asappropriate). There should be noless than one scorer for each 15soldiers tested. Twelve to 15scorers are required when acompany-sized unit is tested.

OIC OR NCOIC

The OIC or NCOIC does thefollowing:• Administers the APFT.• Procures all necessary equipment

and supplies.• Arranges and lays out the test

area.• Trains the event supervisors,

scorers, and demonstrators.(Training video tape No. 21-191should be used for training thosewho administer the APFT.)

• Ensures the test is properlyadministered and the events areexplained, demonstrated, andscored according to the teststandards in this chapter.

• Reports the results after the test.

EVENT SUPERVISORS

Event supervisors do thefollowing:• Administer the test events.• Ensure that necessary equipment

is on hand.• Read the test instructions, and

have the events demonstrated.

• Supervise the scoring of events,and ensure that they are donecorrectly.

• Rule on questions and scoringdiscrepancies for their event.

SCORERS

Scorers do the following:• Supervise the performance of

testees.• Enforce the test standards in this

chapter.• Count the number of correctly

performed repetitions aloud.• Record the correct, raw score on

each soldier’s scorecard, andinitial the scorecard block.

• Perform other duties assigned bythe OIC or NCOIC.

Scorers must be thoroughlytrained to maintain uniform scoringstandards. They do not participate inthe test.

The goal of the APFT is toget an accurate evaluation of the

soldier’s fitness levels.

Page 196: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-8.1

*Instructions for Completing DA Form 705, Army Physical Fitness Scorecard, June 1998.

NAME Print soldier’s last name, first name and middle initial in NAME block.

SSN Print soldier’s social security number in SSN block.

GENDER Print M for male or F for female in GENDER block.

UNIT Print soldier’s unit designation in UNIT block.

DATE Print date the APFT is administered in DATE block.

GRADE Print soldier’s grade in GRADE block.

AGE Print soldier’s age on the date the APFT is administered in AGE block.

HEIGHT Print soldier’s height in HEIGHT block. Height will be rounded to the nearest inch. If the height fraction is less than 1/2inch, round down to the nearest whole number in inches. If the height fraction is greater than 1/2 inch, round up to the next highestwhole number in inches.

WEIGHT Print soldier’s weight in WEIGHT block. Weight will be recorded to the nearest pound. If the weight fraction is less than1/2 pound, round down to the nearest pound. If the weight fraction is 1/2 pound or greater, round up to the nearest pound. CircleGO if soldier meets screening table weight IAW AR 600-9. Circle NO-GO if soldier exceeds screening table weight IAW AR 600-9.

BODY FAT If soldier exceeds screening table weight, print the soldier’s body fat in the BODY FAT block. Percent body fat isrecorded from DA Form 5500-R, Body Fat Content Worksheet, Dec 85, for male soldiers and DA Form 5501-R, Body Fat ContentWorksheet, Dec 85, for female soldiers. Circle GO if soldier meets percent body fat for their age and gender IAW AR 600-9. CircleNO-GO if soldier exceeds percent body fat for their age and gender IAW AR 600-9. If soldier does not exceed screening tableweight or does not appear to have excessive body fat IAW AR 600-9, print N/A (not applicable) in the BODY FAT block.

PU RAW SCORE The event scorer records the number of correctly performed repetitions of the push-up in the PU RAW SCOREblock and prints his or her initials in the INITIALS block.

SU RAW SCORE The event scorer records the number of correctly performed repetitions of the sit-up in the SU RAW SCOREblock and prints his or her initials in the INITIALS block.

2MR RAW SCORE The event scorer records the two-mile run time in the 2MR RAW SCORE block. The time is recorded inminutes and seconds. The event scorer then determines the point value for the two-mile run using the scoring standards on thereverse side of the scorecard. The point value is recorded in the 2MR POINTS block and the event scorer prints his or her initials inthe INITIALS block. In all cases when a point value falls between two point values, the lower point value is used and recorded.The two-mile run event scorer also determines the point value for push-ups and sit-ups using the scoring standards on the reverseside of the scorecard. The point values are recorded in the appropriate push-up and sit-up POINTS block and the event scorerprints his or her initials in the INITIALS block. The two-mile run event scorer totals the points from the three events and records thetotal APFT score in the TOTAL POINTS block.

ALTERNATE AEROBIC EVENT The event scorer prints the alternate aerobic event administered (800-yard swim, 6.2-mile-stationary bicycle ergometer, 6.2-mile-bicycle test or 2.5-mile walk) in the ALTERNATE AEROBIC EVENT block. The time thesoldier completes the alternate aerobic event is recorded in minutes and seconds in the ALTERNATE AEROBIC EVENT block.The standards for the alternate aerobic event tests are listed in FM 21-20, Chapter 14, Figure 14-9. Scoring for all alternate aerobicevents is on a GO or NO-GO basis. No point values are awarded. Circle GO if the soldier completes the alternate aerobic eventwithin the required time or less. Circle NO-GO if the soldier fails to complete the alternate aerobic event within the required time.The alternate aerobic event scorer also determines the point value for push-ups and or sit-ups using the scoring standards on thereverse side of the scorecard. The point values are recorded in the appropriate push-up and or sit-up POINTS block and the eventscorer prints his or her initials in the 2MR INITIALS block. The alternate aerobic event scorer totals the points from the push-up andor sit-up events and records the total APFT score in the TOTAL POINTS block.

NCOIC/OIC Signature The NCOIC/OIC checks all test scores for accuracy and signs their name in the NCOIC/OIC Signatureblock.

COMMENTS The event supervisor, event scorer, NCOIC, or OIC may record comments appropriate to the APFT in theCOMMENTS block. Appropriate comments may include: weather conditions, injury during APFT and or appeals.

Page 197: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-8.2

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.)

Page 198: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

SUPPORT PERSONNEL

Safety and control people should beat the test site, depending on localpolicy and conditions. Medical per-sonnel may also be there. However,they do not have to be on site to havethe APFT conducted. At a minimum,the OIC or NCOIC should have a plan,known to all test personnel, for gettingmedical help if needed.

Test Site

The test site should be fairly flat andfree of debris. It should have the fol-lowing:● An area for stretching and warming

up.● A soft, flat, dry area for perform-

ing push-ups and sit-ups.

A flat, 2-mile running course witha solid surface and no more than athree-percent grade. (Commandersmust use good judgement; no one isexpected to survey terrain.)No significant hazards, (for ex-ample, traffic, slippery road sur-faces, heavy pollution).When necessary or expedient, a

quarter-mile running track can “beused. It can be marked with a series ofstakes along the inside edge. When thetrack is laid out, a horizontal midline279 feet, 9 3/4 inches long must bemarked in the center of a clear area. A120-foot circle is marked at both endsof this line. The track is formed whenthe outermost points of the two circlesare connected with tangent lines. (SeeFigure 14-2.)

Figure 14-2

14-9

Page 199: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

A 400-meter track may be used inplace of the standard quarter-mile(440-yard) track for the 2-mile run,However, one lap run on a 400-metertrack is 92 inches shorter than one lapon a 440-yard track. Eight laps on a400-meter track is 736 inches shorterthan eight laps (2 miles) on a 440-yardtrack. Therefore, soldiers who run the2-mile event on a 400-meter trackmust run eight laps plus an additional61 feet, 4 inches.

Test Procedures

On test day, soldiers are assembledin a common area and briefed by thetest OIC or NCOIC about the purposeand organization of the test. The OICor NCOIC then explains the scorecard,scoring standards, and sequence ofevents.

The instructions printed here inlarge type must be read to the soldiers:“YOU ARE ABOUT TO TAKE THEARMY PHYSICAL FITNESS TEST,A TEST THAT WILL MEASUREYOUR MUSCULAR ENDURANCEAND CARDIORESPIRATORY FIT-NESS. THE RESULTS OF THISTEST WILL GIVE YOU AND YOURCOMMANDERS AN INDICATIONOF YOUR STATE OF FITNESS ANDWILL ACT AS A GUIDE IN DETER-MINING YOUR PHYSICAL TRAIN-ING NEEDS. LISTEN CLOSELY TOTHE TEST INSTRUCTIONS, ANDDO THE BEST YOU CAN ON EACHOF THE EVENTS.”

If scorecards have not already beenissued, they are handed out at thistime. The OIC or NCOIC then says thefollowing: “IN THE APPROPRIATESPACES, PRINT IN INK THE PER-SONAL INFORMATION REQUIREDON THE SCORECARD.” (If score-cards have been issued to the soldiersand filled out before they arrive at thetest site, this remark is omitted.)

The OIC or NCOIC pauses briefly togive the soldiers time to check theinformation. He then says the follow-ing: “YOU ARE TO CARRY THISCARD WITH YOU TO EACH EVENT.BEFORE YOU BEGIN, HAND THECARD TO THE SCORER. AFTERYOU COMPLETE THE EVENT, THESCORER WILL RECORD YOUR RAWSCORE, INITIAL THE CARD, ANDRETURN IT TO YOU.” (At thispoint, the scoring tables are explainedso everyone understands how raw scoresare converted to point scores.) Next,the OIC or NCOIC says the following“EACH OF YOU WILL BE ASSIGNEDTO A GROUP. STAY WITH YOURTEST GROUP FOR THE ENTIRETEST, WHAT ARE YOUR QUES-TIONS ABOUT THE TEST AT THISPOINT?”

Groups are organized as requiredand given final instructions includingwhat to do after the final event. Thetest is then given.

RETAKING OF EVENTS

Soldiers who start an event incor-rectly must be stopped by the scorerbefore they complete 10 repetitionsand told what their errors are. Theyare then sent to the end of the line toawait their turn to retake the event.

A soldier who has problems such asmuscle cramps while performing anevent may rest if he does not assume anillegal position in the process. If hecontinues, he receives credit for allcorrectly done repetitions within thetwo-minute period. If he does notcontinue, he gets credit for the numberof correct repetitions he has performedup to that time. If he has not done 10correct repetitions, he is sent to the endof the line to retake that event. He maynot retake the event if he has exceeded10 repetitions. Soldiers who are unableto perform 10 correct repetitions be-cause of low fitness levels may notretake an event.

14-10

Page 200: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

TEST FAILURES

Soldiers who stop to rest in an au-thorized rest position continue to re-ceive credit for correct repetitions per-formed after their rest. Soldiers whorest in an unauthorized rest positionwill have their performance in thatevent immediately terminated.

The records of soldiers who fail arecord APFT for the first time andthose who fail to take the APFT withinthe required period (AR 350-15, para-graph 11) must be flagged IAW AR600-8-2 (Reference B).

RETESTING

Soldiers who fail any or all of theevents must retake the entire APFT. Incase of test failure, commanders mayallow soldiers to retake the test as soonas the soldiers and commanders feelthey are ready. Soldiers without amedical profile will be retested not-later-than three months following theinitial APFT failure in accordancewith AR 350-15, paragraph 11.

Test Sequence

The test sequence is the push-up,sit-up, and 2-mile run (or alternate,aerobic event). The order of eventscannot be changed. There are noexceptions to this sequence.

Soldiers should be allowed no lessthan 10 minutes, but ideally no morethan 20 minutes, to recover betweeneach event. The OIC or NCOIC deter-mines the time to be allotted betweenevents, as it will depend on the totalnumber of soldiers who are participat-ing in the APFT. If many soldiers areto be tested, staggered starting timesshould be planned to allow the properintervals between events. Under nocircumstances is the APFT valid if asoldier cannot begin and end all threeevents in two hours or less.

The following paragraphs describethe equipment, facilities, personnel,

instructions, administration, timingtechniques, and scorers’ duties for thepushup, sit-up, and 2-mile-run events.

PUSH-UPS

Push-ups measure the endurance ofthe chest, shoulder, and triceps muscles.(See Figure 14-3.)

Equipment

One stopwatch is needed along withone clipboard and pen for each scorer.The event supervisor must have thefollowing the instructions in this chap-ter on how to conduct the event andone copy of the push-up scoring stan-dards (DA Form 705).

Facilities

There must be at least one teststation for every 15 soldiers to betested. Each station is 6 feet wide and15 feet deep.

Personnel

One event supervisor must beat thetest site and one scorer at each station.The event supervisor may not be theevent scorer.

Instructions

The event supervisor must read thefollowing: “THE PUSH-UP EVENTMEASURES THE ENDURANCE OFTHE CHEST, SHOULDER, ANDTRICEPS MUSCLES. ON THECOMMAND ‘GET SET,’ ASSUMETHE FRONT-LEANING REST PO-SITION BY PLACING YOUR HANDSWHERE THEY ARE COMFORT-ABLE FOR YOU. YOUR FEETMAY BE TOGETHER OR UP TO 12INCHES APART. WHEN VIEWEDFROM THE SIDE, YOUR BODYSHOULD FORM A GENERALLYSTRAIGHT LINE FROM YOURSHOULDERS TO YOUR ANKLES.

14-11

Page 201: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

ON THE COMMAND ‘GO,’ BEGINTHE PUSH-UP BY BENDING YOURELBOWS AND LOWERING YOURENTIRE BODY AS A SINGLE UNITUNTIL YOUR UPPER ARMS AREAT LEAST PARALLEL TO THEGROUND. THEN, RETURN TOTHE STARTING POSITION BYRAISING YOUR ENTIRE BODYUNTIL YOUR ARMS ARE FULLYEXTENDED. YOUR BODY MUSTREMAIN RIGID IN A GENERALLYSTRAIGHT LINE AND MOVE AS AUNIT WHILE PERFORMING EACHREPETITION. AT THE END OFEACH REPETITION, THE SCORERWILL STATE THE NUMBER OFREPETITIONS YOU HAVE COM-PLETED CORRECTLY. IF YOUFAIL TO KEEP YOUR BODY GEN-ERALLY STRAIGHT, TO LOWERYOUR WHOLE BODY UNTIL YOURUPPER ARMS ARE AT LEAST PAR-ALLEL TO THE GROUND, OR TO

E X T E N D Y O U R A R M S C O M -PLETELY, THAT REPETITION WILLNOT COUNT, AND THE SCORERWILL REPEAT THE NUMBER OFTHE LAST CORRECTLY PER-FORMED REPETITION. IF YOUFAIL TO PERFORM THE FIRSTTEN PUSH-UPS CORRECTLY, THESCORER WILL TELL YOU TO GOTO YOUR KNEES AND WILL EX-PLAIN TO YOU WHAT YOUR MIS-TAKES ARE. YOU WILL THEN BESENT TO THE END OF THE LINETO BE RETESTED. AFTER THEFIRST 10 PUSH-UPS HAVE BEENPERFORMED AND COUNTED,HOWEVER, NO RESTARTS AREALLOWED. THE TEST WILL CON-TINUE, AND ANY INCORRECTLYPERFORMED PUSH-UPS WILL NOTBE COUNTED. AN ALTERED,FRONT-LEANING REST POSITIONIS THE ONLY AUTHORIZED RESTPOSITION. THAT IS, YOU MAY

14-12

Page 202: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

SAG IN THE MIDDLE OR FLEXYOUR BACK. WHEN FLEXINGYOUR BACK, YOU MAY BENDYOUR KNEES, BUT NOT TO SUCHAN EXTENT THAT YOU ARESUPPORTING MOST OF YOURBODY WEIGHT WITH YOUR LEGS.IF THIS OCCURS, YOUR PERFORM-ANCE WILL BE TERMINATED. YOUMUST RETURN TO, AND PAUSEIN, THE CORRECT STARTINGPOSITION BEFORE CONTINUING.IF YOU REST ON THE GROUNDOR RAISE EITHER HAND OR FOOTF R O M T H E G R O U N D , Y O U RPERFORMANCE WILL BE TERMI-NATED. YOU MAY REPOSITIONYOUR HANDS AND/OR FEETDURING THE EVENT AS LONG ASTHEY REMAIN IN CONTACT WITHTHE GROUND AT ALL TIMES.CORRECT PERFORMANCE IS IM-PORTANT. YOU WILL HAVE TWOMINUTES IN WHICH TO DO ASMANY PUSH-UPS AS YOU CAN.WATCH THIS DEMONSTRATION.”(The exercise is then demonstrated.See Figure 14-4 for a list of points thatneed to be made during the demonstra-

Administration

After reading the instructions, thesupervisor answers questions. Then hemoves the groups to their testing sta-tions. The event supervisor cannot beready to begin. Successive groups do

the event until all soldiers have com-pleted it.

Timing Techniques

The event supervisor is the timer.He calls out the time remaining every30 seconds and every second for thelast 10 seconds of the two minutes. Heends the event after two minutes bythe command “Halt!”

Scorers’ Duties

Scorers must allow for differencesin the body shape and structure ofeach soldier. The scorer uses eachsoldier’s starting position as a guidethroughout the event to evaluate eachrepetition. The scorer should talk tothe soldier before the event begins andhave him do a few repetitions as awarm-up and reference to ensure he is

tion.) “WHAT ARE -YOUR QUES- doing the exercise correctly.TIONS?”

Figure 14-4

14-13

Page 203: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

The scorer may either sit or kneelabout three feet from the testee’sshoulder at a 45-degree angle in frontof it. The scorer’s head should beabout even with the testee’s shoulderwhen the latter is in the front-leaningrest position. Each scorer determinesfor himself if he will sit or kneel whenscoring. He may not lie down or standwhile scoring. He counts out loud thenumber of correct repetitions com-pleted and repeats the number of thelast correct push-up if an incorrectone is done. Scorers tell the testeeswhat they do wrong as it occurs dur-ing the event. A critique of theperformance is done following thetest.

When the soldier completes theevent, the scorer records the numberof correctly performed repetitions,initials the scorecard, and returns it tothe soldier.

SIT-UPS

This event measures the enduranceof the abdominal and hip-flexormuscles. (See Figure 14-5.)

Equipment

One stopwatch is needed along withone clipboard and pen for each scorer.The event supervisor must have thefollowing: the instructions in this chap-ter on how to conduct the event andone copy of the sit-up scoring stan-dards (DA Form 705).

Facilities

Each station is 6 feet wide and 15 feetdeep. Ensure that no more than 15soldiers are tested at a station.

Personnel

One event supervisor must be at thetest site and one scorer at each station.The event supervisor may not be theevent scorer.

Instructions

The event supervisor must read thefollowing: “THE SIT-UP EVENTMEASURES THE ENDURANCE OFT H E A B D O M I N A L A N D H I P -FLEXOR MUSCLES. ON THE

Figure 14-5

14-14

Page 204: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

COMMAND “GET SET”, ASSUMETHE STARTING POSITION BYLYING ON YOUR BACK WITHYOUR KNEES BENT AT A 90-DEGREE ANGLE. YOUR FEET MAYBE TOGETHER OR UP TO 12 INCHESAPART. ANOTHER PERSON WILLHOLD YOUR ANKLES WITH THEHANDS ONLY. NO OTHER METHODOF BRACING OR HOLDING THEFEET IS AUTHORIZED. THE HEELIS THE ONLY PART OF YOURFOOT THAT MUST STAY IN CON-TACT WITH THE GROUND. YOURFINGERS MUST BE INTERLOCKEDBEHIND YOUR HEAD AND THEBACKS OF YOUR HANDS MUSTTOUCH THE GROUND. YOURARMS AND ELBOWS NEED NOTTOUCH THE GROUND. ON THECOMMAND “GO”, BEGIN RAIS-ING YOUR UPPER BODY FOR-WARD TO, OR BEYOND, THE

VERTICAL POSITION. THE VER-TICAL POSITION MEANS THATTHE BASE OF YOUR NECK ISABOVE THE BASE OF YOUR SPINE.AFTER YOU HAVE REACHED ORSURPASSED THE VERTICAL POSI-TION, LOWER YOUR BODY UNTILTHE BOTTOM OF YOUR SHOUL-D E R B L A D E S T O U C H T H EGROUND. YOUR HEAD, HANDS,ARMS, OR ELBOWS DO NOT HAVETO TOUCH THE GROUND. ATTHE END OF EACH REPETITION,THE SCORER WILL STATE THENUMBER OF SIT-UPS YOU HAVECORRECTLY COMPLETED. AREPETITION WILL NOT COUNT IFYOU FAIL TO REACH THE VER-TICAL POSITION, FAIL TO KEEPYOUR FINGERS INTERLOCKEDBEHIND YOUR HEAD, ARCH ORBOW YOUR BACK AND RAISEY O U R B U T T O C K S O F F T H E

Figure 14-6

14-15

Page 205: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

GROUND TO RAISE YOUR UPPERBODY, OR LET YOUR KNEESEXCEED A 90-DEGREE ANGLE.IF A REPETITION DOES NOTCOUNT, THE SCORER WILL RE-PEAT THE NUMBER OF YOURLAST CORRECTLY PERFORMEDSIT-UP. THE UP POSITION IS THEONLY AUTHORIZED REST POSI-TION. IF YOU STOP AND REST INTHE DOWN (STARTING) POSITION,THE EVENT WILL BE TERMI-NATED. AS LONG AS YOU MAKEA CONTINUOUS PHYSICAL EF-FORT TO SIT UP, THE EVENTWILL NOT BE TERMINATED. YOUMAY NOT USE YOUR HANDS ORANY OTHER MEANS TO PULL ORPUSH YOURSELF UP TO THE UP(RESTING) POSITION OR TO HOLDYOURSELF IN THE REST POSI-TION. IF YOU DO SO, YOUR PER-FORMANCE IN THE EVENT WILLBE TERMINATED. CORRECT PER-FORMANCE IS IMPORTANT. YOUWILL HAVE TWO MINUTES TOPERFORM AS MANY SIT-UPS ASYOU CAN. WATCH THIS DEMON-STRATION.” (The exercise is thendemonstrated. See Figure 14-6 for alist of points that need to be madeduring the demonstration.) “WHATARE YOUR QUESTIONS?”

Administration

After reading the instructions, thesupervisor answers questions. He thenmoves the groups to their testing sta-tions. The event supervisor cannot bea scorer. At this point, the testing isready to begin. Successive groups dothe event until all soldiers have com-pleted it.

Timing Techniques

The event supervisor is the timer.He calls out the time remaining every30 seconds and every second for thelast 10 seconds of the two minutes. He

ends the event after two minutes by thecommand “Halt!”

Scorers’ Duties

The scorer may either kneel or sitabout three feet from the testee’s hip.The scorer’s head should be about evenwith the testee’s shoulder when thelatter is in the vertical (up) position.Each scorer decides for himself whetherto sit or kneel down when scoring. Hemay not lie down or stand whilescoring. The scorer counts aloud thenumber of correctly performed sit-upsand repeats the number of the lastcorrectly performed repetition if anincorrect one is done. Scorers tell thetestees what they are doing wrong as itoccurs during the event. A critique ofhis performance is given to each sol-dier after the event. When the soldiercompletes the event, the scorer recordsthe number of correctly performed sit-ups, initials the scorecard, and returnsit to the soldier.

When checking for correct bodyposition, the scorer must be sure that ata 90-degree angle is formed at eachknee by the soldier’s upper and lowerleg. The angle to be measured is not theone formed by the lower leg and theground. If, while performing the sit-up event, this angle becomes greaterthan 90 degrees, the scorer shouldinstruct the testee and holder to repo-sition the legs to the proper angle andobtain compliance before allowing thetestee’s performance to continue. Theloss of the proper angle does notterminate the testee’s performance inthe event. When the soldier comes tothe vertical position, the scorer must besure that the base of the soldier’s neckis above or past the base of the spine.A soldier who simply touches his kneeswith his elbows may not come to acompletely vertical position. The scorermust ensure that the holder uses onlyhis hands to brace the exerciser’s feet.

14-16

Page 206: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

TWO-MILE RUN

This event tests cardiorespiratory(aerobic) endurance and the enduranceof the leg muscles. (See Figure 14-7.)

Equipment

Two stopwatches for the eventsupervisor, one clipboard and pen foreach scorer, copies of the event’s in-structions and standards, and numbersfor the testees are needed.

Facilities

There must be a level area with nomore than a three-degree slope onwhich a measured course has beenmarked. An oval-shaped track ofknown length may be used. If a roadcourse is used, the start and finish andone-mile (half way) point must be clearlymarked.

Personnel

One event supervisor and at leastone scorer for every 15 runners arerequired.

Instructions

The event supervisor must read thefollowing: “THE TWO-MILE RUN ISUSED TO ASSESS YOUR AEROBICF I T N E S S A N D Y O U R L E GMUSCLES’ ENDURANCE. Y o uMUST COMPLETE THE RUN WITH-OUT ANY PHYSICAL HELP. ATTHE START, ALL SOLDIERS WILLLINE UP BEHIND THE STARTINGLINE. ON THE COMMAND ‘GO,’THE CLOCK WILL START. YOUWILL BEGIN RUNNING AT YOUROWN PACE. TO RUN THE RE-QUIRED TWO MILES, YOU MUSTCOMPLETE (describe the number oflaps, start and finish points, and courselayout). YOU ARE BEING TESTEDON YOUR ABILITY TO COMPLETETHE 2-MILE COURSE IN THESHORTEST TIME POSSIBLE. AL-THOUGH WALKING IS AUTHOR-IZED, IT IS STRONGLY DISCOUR-AGED. IF YOU ARE PHYSICALLYHELPED IN ANY WAY (FOR EX-AMPLE, PULLED, PUSHED,PICKED UP, AND/OR CARRIED)OR LEAVE THE DESIGNATEDRUNNING COURSE FOR ANY

Figure 14-7

14-17

Page 207: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

REASON, YOU WILL BE DISQUALI-FIED. (IT IS LEGAL TO PACE ASOLDIER DURING THE 2-MILERUN. AS LONG AS THERE IS NOPHYSICAL CONTACT WITH THEPACED SOLDIER AND IT DOESNOT PHYSICALLY HINDER OTHERSOLDIERS TAKING THE TEST, THEPRACTICE OF RUNNING AHEADOF, ALONG SIDE OF, OR BEHINDTHE TESTED SOLDIER, WHILESERVING AS A PACER, IS PER-MITTED. CHEERING OR CALL-ING OUT THE ELAPSED TIME ISALSO PERMITTED.) THE NUM-BER ON YOUR CHEST IS FORIDENTIFICATION. YOU MUSTMAKE SURE IT IS VISIBLE AT ALLTIMES. TURN IN YOUR NUMBERWHEN YOU FINISH THE RUN.THEN, GO TO THE AREA DESIG-NATED FOR THE COOL-DOWNAND STRETCH. DO NOT STAYNEAR THE SCORERS OR THEFINISH LINE AS THIS MAY IN-TERFERE WITH THE TESTING.WHAT ARE YOUR QUESTIONS ONTHIS EVENT?”

Administration

After reading the instructions, thesupervisor answers questions. He thenorganizes the soldiers into groups of nomore than 10. The scorer for eachgroup assigns a number to each soldierin the group. At the same time, thescorer collects the scorecards and rec-ords each soldier’s number.

Timing Techniques

The event supervisor is the timer.He uses the commands “Get set” and“Go.” Two stopwatches are used incase one fails. As the soldiers near thefinish line, the event supervisor callsoff the time in minutes and seconds(for example, “Fifteen-thirty, fifteen-thirty-one, fifteen-thirty -two,” andso on).

Scorers’ Duties

The scorers observe those runners intheir groups, monitor their laps (ifappropriate), and record their times asthey cross the finish line. (It is oftenhelpful to record the soldiers’ numbersand times on a separate sheet of paperor card. This simplifies the recordingof finish times when large groups ofsoldiers are simultaneously tested.) Afterall runners have completed the run, thescorers determine the point value foreach soldier’s run time, record thepoint values on the scorecards, andenter their initials in the scorers’ blocks.In all cases, when a time falls betweentwo point values, the lower point valueis used and recorded. For example, ifa female soldier, age 17 to 21, runs thetwo miles in 15 minutes and 19 sec-onds, the score awarded is 95 points.

At this time, the scorers for the 2-mile run also convert the raw scores forthe push-up and sit-up events by usingthe scoring standards on the back sideof the scorecard. They enter thosepoint values on the scorecards anddetermine the total APFT score foreach soldier before giving the score-cards to the test’s OIC or NCOIC.After the test scores have been checked,the test’s OIC or NCOIC signs allscorecards and returns them to theunit’s commander or designated repre-sentative.

Test Results

The soldier’s fitness performancefor each APFT event is determined byconverting the raw score for each eventto a point score.

Properly interpreted, performanceon the APFT shows the following:●

Each soldier’s level of physical fit-ness.The entire unit’s level of physicalfitness.Deficiencies in physical fitness.Soldiers who need special attention.

14-18

Page 208: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

(Leaders must develop special pro-grams to improve the performanceof soldiers who are below the re-quired standards.)Commanders should not try to de-

termine the individual’s or the unit’sstrengths and weaknesses in fitness byusing only the total scores. A detailedstudy of the results on each event ismore important. For a proper analysisof the unit’s performance, event scoresshould be used. They are corrected forage and sex. Therefore, a female’s 80-point push-up score should be con-sidered the same as a male’s 80-pointpush-up score. Using the total pointvalue or raw scoresinterpretation.

Scores Above

APFT events, the official, maximumscore on the APFT must remain at 300(100 points per event). Some com-manders, however, want to knowunofficial point scores to reward sol-diers for their extra effort.

Only those soldiers who score 100points in all three events are eligible todetermine their score on an extendedscale. To fairly determine the pointsearned, extra points are awarded at thesame rate as points obtained for scoresat or below the 100 point level. Eachpush-up and sit-up beyond the maxi-mum is worth one point as is every six-second decrease in the run time. Take,

may distort the for example, the following case shownin Figure 14-8. A male soldier per-forms above the maximum in the 17-21

Maximumage group by doing 87 push-ups and98 sit-ups and by running the twomiles in 11 minutes and 12 seconds.

Even though some soldiers exceed His score would be calculated as fol-the maximum score on one or more lows:

Figure 14-8

14-19

Page 209: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

The calculations on the previouspage, give the soldier a total score of318 points. This method lets the com-mander easily determine the scores forperformances that are above the maxi-mum. He may recognize soldiers fortheir outstanding fitness achievements,not only on the APFT but also forother, unofficial fitness challenges.Using this method ensures that eachsoldier has an equal chance to berecognized for any of the tested fitnesscomponents. Commanders may alsoestablish their own incentive programsand set their own unit’s standards (AR350-15).

Temporary Profiles

A soldier with a temporary profilemust take the regular three-event APFTafter the profile has expired. (Soldierswith temporary profiles of more thanthree months may take an alternate testas determined by the commander withinput from health-care personnel. )Once the profile is lifted, the soldiermust be given twice the time of theprofile (but not more than 90 days) totrain for the APFT. For example, ifthe profile period was 7 days, thesoldier has 14 days to train for theAPFT after the profile period ends. Ifa normally scheduled APFT occursduring the profile period, the soldiershould be given a mandatory make-update.

Permanent Profiles

A permanently profiled soldier isgiven a physical training program bythe profiling officer using the positiveprofile form DA 3349 (see AppendixB). The profiling officer gives theunit’s commander a list of physicalactivities that are suitable for theprofiled soldier. He also indicates theevents and/or alternate aerobic eventthat the soldier will do on the APFT.This recommendation, made afterconsultation with the profiled soldier,should address the soldier’s abilities

and preference and the equipmentavailable. (See DA Form 3349, Physi-cal Profile, referenced in AR 40-501.)

The profiled soldier must performall the regular APFT events his medi-cal profile permits. Each soldier mustearn at least 60 points on the regularevents to receive a “go.” He must alsocomplete the alternate event in a timeequal to or less than the one listed forhis age group. For example, a soldierwhose profile forbids only running willdo the push-up and sit-up events andan alternate aerobic event. He must getat least a minimum passing score oneach event to earn a “go” for the test. Asoldier whose profile prevents two ormore APFT events must complete the2-mile run or an alternate aerobicevent to earn a “go” on the test. Soldierswho cannot do any of the aerobicevents due to a profile cannot be tested.Such information will be recorded intheir official military record.

The standards for alternate eventsare listed in Figure 14-9. Scoring forall alternate events is on a go/no gobasis. Soldiers who do push-up andsit-up events but who take an alternateaerobic event are not awarded promo-tion points for APFT performance.

Alternate Events

Alternate APFT events assess theaerobic fitness and muscular endur-ance of soldiers with permanent medi-cal profiles or long-term (greater thanthree months) temporary profiles whocannot take the regular, three-eventAPFT.

The alternate aerobic APFT eventsare the following:● 800-yard-swim test.● 6.2-mile-stationary- bicycle ergome-

ter test with a resistance settingof 2 kiloponds (2 kilograms) or20 newtons.

● 6.2-mile-bicycle test on a conven-tional bicycle using one speed.

● 2.5-mile-walk test.

14-20

Page 210: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-21

ALTERNATE TEST STANDARDS BY EVENT, SEX, AND AGE

AGEEVENT SEX

17-21 22-26 27-31 32-36 37-41 42-46 47-51 52-56 57-61 62+

800-YARDSWIM

MenWomen

20:0021:00

20:3021:30

21:0022:00

21:3022:30

22:0023:00

22:3023:30

23:0024:00

24:0025:00

24:3025:30

25:0026:00

6.2-MILEBIKE

(Stationaryand track)

MenWomen

24:0025:00

24:3025:30

25:0026:00

25:3026:30

26:0027:00

27:0028:00

28:0030:00

30:0032:00

31:0033:00

32:0034:00

2.5-MILEWALK

MenWomen

34:0037:00

34:3037:30

35:0038:00

35:3038:30

36:0039:00

36:3039:30

37:0040:00

37:3040:30

38:0041:00

38:3041:30

*Figure 14-9

800-YARD-SWIM TEST

This event is used to assess cardio-respiratory (aerobic) fitness. (SeeFigure 14-10.)

Equipment

Two stopwatches, one clipboard and penfor each scorer, one copy each of the testinstructions and standards, and appropriatesafety equipment are needed.

Facilities

A swimming pool at least 25 yards longand 3 feet deep, or an approved facility, isneeded.

Personnel

One event supervisor and at least onescorer for every soldier to be tested arerequired. Appropriate safety, control, andmedical personnel must also be present.

Instructions

The event supervisor must read thefollowing statement: “THE 800-YARDSWIM IS USED TO ASSESS YOURLEVEL OF AEROBIC FITNESS. YOUWILL BEGIN IN THE WATER; NODIVING IS ALLOWED. AT THE START,YOUR BODY MUST BE IN CONTACT

WITH THE WALL OF THE POOL. ONTHE COMMAND ‘GO,’ THE CLOCKWILL START. YOU SHOULD THENBEGIN SWIMMING AT YOUR OWNPACE, USING ANY STROKE ORCOMBINATION OF STROKES YOUWISH. YOU MUST SWIM (tell thenumber) LAPS TO COMPLETE THISDISTANCE. YOU MUST TOUCH THEWALL OF THE POOL AT EACH ENDOF THE POOL AS YOU TURN. ANYTYPE OF TURN IS AUTHORIZED. YOUWILL BE SCORED ON YOUR ABILITYTO COMPLETE THE SWIM IN A TIMEEQUAL TO, OR LESS THAN, THATLISTED FOR YOUR AGE AND SEX.WALKING ON THE BOTTOM TORECUPERATE IS AUTHORIZED.SWIMMING GOGGLES ARE PER-MITTED, BUT NO OTHER EQUIP-MENT IS AUTHORIZED. WHAT AREYOUR QUESTIONS ABOUT THISEVENT?”

Page 211: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

14-22

Figure 14-10

Administration

After reading the instructions, the eventsupervisor answers only related questions.He assigns one soldier to each lane and tellsthe soldiers to enter the water. He givesthem a short warm-up period to acclimate tothe water temperature and loosen up. Aboveall, the event supervisor must be alert to thesafety of the testees throughout the test.

Timing Techniques

The event supervisor is the timer. Heuses the commands “Get set” and “Go.”Two stopwatches are used in case one fails.As the soldiers near the finish, the eventsupervisor begins calling off the elapsedtime in minutes and seconds (for example,“Nineteen-eleven, nineteen-twelve,nineteen-thirteen,” and so on). The time isrecorded when each soldier touches the endof the pool on the final lap or crosses a lineset as the 800-yard mark.

Scorers’ Duties

Scorers must observe the swimmersassigned to the. They must be sure that eachswimmer touches the bulkhead at everyturn. The scorers record each soldier’s time

in the 2-mile-run block on the scorecardand use the comment block to identify thetime as an 800-yard-swim time. If the poollength is measured in meters, the scorersconvert the exact distance to yards. Toconvert meters to yards, multiply thenumber of meters by 39.37 and divide theproduct by 36; that is, (meters x 39.37)/36= yards. For example, 400 meters equals437.4 yards; that is, (400 x 39.37)/36 =437.4 yards.

6.2-MILE STATIONARY-BICYCLEERGOMETER TEST

This event is used to assess the soldier’scardiorespiratory and leg-muscleendurance. (See Figure 14-11.)

Equipment

Two stopwatches, one clipboard andpen for each scorer, a copy of the testinstructions and standards, and onestat ionary bicycle ergometer areneeded. The ergometers should measureresistance in kiloponds or newtons. Thebicycle should be one that can be usedfor training and testing. Its seat and

800-YARD SWIM

Page 212: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure 14-11

handlebars must be adjustable to let the Instructionssoldier fully extend his legs whenpedaling. It should have an adjustabletension setting and an odometer. Theresistance is usually set by a tensionstrap on a weighted pendulum con-nected to the flywheel. See AppendixD for guidance on using various typesof stationary bikes.

Facilities

The test site can be any place wherethere is an approved bicycle ergometer.This could be the post’s fitness facilityor the hospital’s therapy clinic. Eachtest station must be two yards wide andfour yards deep.

Personnel

One event supervisor and at leastone scorer for every three soldiers to betested are required. Appropriate safety,control, and medical personnel shouldalso be present.

The event supervisor must read thefollowing: “THE 6.2-MILE STA-TIONARY-BICYCLE ERGOMETEREVENT TESTS YOUR CARDI-ORESPIRATORY FITNESS AND LEGM U S C L E E N D U R A N C E . T H EERGOMETER’S RESISTANCE MUSTBE SET AT TWO KILOPOUNDS (20NEWTONS). ON THE COMMAND‘GO,’ THE CLOCK WILL START,AND YOU WILL BEGIN PEDAL-ING AT YOUR OWN PACE WHILEMAINTAINING THE RESISTANCEINDICATOR AT TWO POUNDS.YOU WILL BE SCORED ON YOURABILITY TO COMPLETE 6.2 MILES(10 KILOMETERS), AS SHOWN ONTHE ODOMETER, IN A TIMEEQUAL TO OR LESS THAN THATLISTED FOR YOUR AGE AND SEX.WHAT ARE YOUR QUESTIONSABOUT THIS EVENT?”

14-23

Page 213: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Administration

After reading the instructions, theevent supervisor answers any relatedquestions. Each soldier is given a shortwarm-up period and allowed to adjustthe seat and handlebar height.

Timing Techniques

The event supervisor is the timer.He uses the commands “Get set” and“Go.” Two stopwatches are used incase one fails. As the soldiers pedal thelast two-tenths of the test distance, theevent supervisor should start callingoff the time in minutes and seconds(for example, “Twenty-thirty-one,twenty -thirty -two, twenty-thirty-three,” and so on). He calls the timeremaining every 30 seconds for the lasttwo minutes of the allowable time andevery second during the last ten sec-onds.

Scorers’ Duties

Scorers must ensure that the bicycleergometer is functioning properly. Theymust then make sure that the bicycleergometers’ tension settings have beencalibrated and are accurate and thatthe resistance of the ergometers hasbeen set at two kiloponds (20 new-tons). The scorers must observe thesoldiers throughout the event. Fromtime to time the scorer may need tomake small adjustments to the resis-tance control to ensure that a continu-ous resistance of exactly 2 kiloponds(20 newtons) is maintained throughoutthe test. At the end of the test, theyrecord each soldier’s time on the score-card in the 2-mile-run block, initialthe appropriate block, and note in thecomment block that the time is for a6.2-mile stationary-bicycle ergometertest.

6.2-MILE BICYCLE TEST

This event is used to assess thesoldier’s cardiorespiratory and leg-muscle endurance.

Equipment

Two stopwatches, one clipboard andpen for each scorer, a copy of the testinstructions and standards, and num-bers are needed. Although one-speedbicycles are preferred for this event,multispeed bicycles may be used. If amultispeed bicycle is used, measuresmust be taken to ensure that only onegear is used throughout the test. (Thiscan usually be done by taping the gearshifters at the setting preferred by thetestee.)

Facilities

A relatively flat course with a uni-form surface and no obstacles must beused. It must also be clearly marked.Soldiers should not be tested on aquarter-mile track, and they shouldnever be out of the scorers’ sight. Thecourse should be completely free ofrunners and walkers.

Personnel

One event supervisor and at leastone scorer for every 10 soldiers are re-quired. Safety, control, and medicalpersonnel should also be present asappropriate.

instructions

The event supervisor must read thefollowing: “THE 6.2-MILE BICYCLETEST IS USED TO ASSESS YOURCARDIORESPIRATORY FITNESSAND LEG MUSCLES’ ENDURANCE.YOU MUST COMPLETE THE 6.2

14-24

Page 214: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

MILES WITHOUT ANY PHYSICALHELP FROM OTHERS. YOU MUSTKEEP YOUR BICYCLE IN ONEGEAR OF YOUR CHOOSING FORTHE ENTIRE TEST. CHANGINGGEARS IS NOT PERMITTED ANDWILL RESULT IN DISQUALIFICA-TION. TO BEGIN, YOU WILL LINEUP BEHIND THE STARTING LINE.ON THE COMMAND ‘GO,’ THECLOCK WILL START, AND YOUWILL BEGIN PEDALING AT YOUROWN PACE. TO COMPLETE THEREQUIRED DISTANCE OF 6.2MILES, YOU MUST COMPLETE(describe the number of laps, start andfinish points, and course layout). YOUWILL BE SCORED ON YOUR ABIL-ITY TO COMPLETE THE DISTANCE-OF 6.2 MILES ( 10 KILOMETERS) INA TIME EQUAL TO OR LESS THANTHAT LISTED FOR YOUR AGEAND SEX. IF YOU LEAVE THEDESIGNATED COURSE FOR ANY

REASON, YOU WILL BE DISQUALI-FIED. WHAT ARE YOUR QUES-TIONS ABOUT THIS EVENT?”

Administration

After reading the instructions, theevent supervisor answers any relatedquestions. He then organizes the sol-diers into groups of no more than tenand assigns each group to a scorer.Scorers assign numbers to the soldiersin their groups and record each sol-dier’s number on the appropriate score-card.

Timing Techniques

The event supervisor is the timer.He uses the commands “Get set” and“Go.” Two stopwatches are used incase one fails. As soldiers near the endof the 6.2-mile ride, the event super-visor starts calling off the time in

14-25

Page 215: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

minutes and seconds (for example,“Thirty-twenty-one, thirty- twenty-two, thirty -twenty-three,” and so on).

Scorers’ Duties

When the event is over, scorersrecord each soldier’s time in the 2-mile-run block. They initial the ap-propriate block and note in thecomment block that the time is for a6.2-mile-bicycle test and whether ornot the testee met the required stan-dards for his age and sex.

2.5-MILE WALK

This event serves to assess cardi-orespiratory and leg-muscle endur-ance.

Equipment

Two stopwatches, one clipboard andpen for each scorer, numbers, andcopies of the test instructions andstandards are needed.

Facilities

This event uses the same course asthe 2-mile run.

Personnel

One event supervisor and at leastone scorer for every three soldiers to betested are required. Appropriate safety,control, and medical personnel shouldbe present.

14-26

Page 216: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Instructions

The event supervisor must read thefollowing: “THE 2.5-MILE WALK ISUSED TO ASSESS YOUR CARDI-ORESPIRATORY FITNESS ANDLEG-MUSCLE ENDURANCE. ONTHE COMMAND ‘GO,’ THE CLOCKWILL START, AND YOU WILLBEGIN WALKING AT YOUR OWNPACE. YOU MUST COMPLETE(describe the number of laps, start andfinish points, and course layout). ONEFOOT MUST BE IN CONTACT WITHTHE GROUND AT ALL TIMES. IFYOU BREAK INTO A RUNNINGSTRIDE AT ANY TIME OR HAVEBOTH FEET OFF THE GROUND ATTHE SAME TIME, YOUR PERFORM-ANCE IN THE EVENT WILL BETERMINATED. YOU WILL BESCORED ON YOUR ABILITY TOCOMPLETE THE 2.5-MILE COURSEIN A TIME EQUAL TO OR LESSTHAN THAT LISTED FOR YOURAGE AND SEX. WHAT ARE YOURQUESTIONS ABOUT THIS EVENT?”

Administration

After reading the instructions, theevent supervisor answers any relatedquestions. He then divides the soldiers

into groups of no more than three andassigns each group to a scorer. Eachsoldier is issued a number which thescorer records on the scorecard.

Timing Techniques

The even t supe rv i so r i s t hetimer. He uses the commands “Get set”and “Go.” Two stopwatches are used incase one fails. As the soldiers near theend of the 2.5-mile walk, the eventsupervisor starts calling off the elapsedtime in minutes and seconds (forexample,"Thirty-three-twenty-two,thirty -three -twenty -three, thirty-three-twenty -four,” and so on).

Scorers’ Duties

Scorers must observe the soldiersduring the entire event and must en-sure that the soldiers maintain a walk-ing stride. Soldiers who break into anytype of running stride will be termi-nated from the event and given a “nogo.” When the event is over, scorersrecord the time in the 2-mile-runblock on the scorecard, initial the ap-propriate block, and note in the com-ment block that the time is for a 2.5-mile walk and whether or not thetestee received a "go" or "no go."

14-27

Page 217: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

APPENDIX A

PHYSIOLOGICAL DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE SEXES

Soldiers vary in their physical makeup. Each body reacts differently to varying degrees of physical stress,and no two bodies react exactly the same way to the same physical stress. For everyone to get the maximumbenefit from training, leaders must be aware of these differences and plan the training to provide maximumbenefit for everyone. They must also be aware of the physiological differences between men and women.While leaders must require equal efforts of men and women during the training period, they must also realizethat women have physiological limitations which generally preclude equal performance. The followingparagraphs describe the most important physical and physiological differences between men and women.

SIZE

The average 18- year-old man is 70.2 inches tall and weighs 144.8 pounds, whereas the average womanof the same age is 64.4 inches tall and weighs 126.6 pounds. This difference in size affects the absoluteamount of physical work that can be performed by men and women.

MUSCLES

Men have 50 percent greater total muscle mass, based on weight, than do women. A woman who is thesame size as her male counterpart is generally only 80 percent as strong. Therefore, men usually have anadvantage in strength, speed, and power over women.

FAT

Women carry about 10 percentage points more body fat than do men of the same age. Men accumulatefat primarily in the back, chest, and abdomen; women gain fat in the buttocks, arms, and thighs. Also,because the center of gravity is lower in women than in men, women must overcome more resistance inactivities that require movement of the lower body.

BONES

Women have less bone mass than men, but their pelvic structure is wider. This difference gives men anadvantage in running efficiency.

HEART SIZE AND RATE

The average woman’s heart is 25 percent smaller than the average man’s. Thus, the man’s heart can pumpmore blood with each beat. The larger heart size contributes to the slower resting heart rate (five to eightbeats a minute slower) in males. This lower rate is evident both at rest and at any given level of submaximalexercise. Thus, for any given work rate, the faster heart rate means that most women will become fatiguedsooner than men.

FLEXIBILITY

Women generally are more flexible than men.

A-O

Page 218: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

LUNGS

The lung capacity of men is 25 to 30 percent greater than that of women. This gives men still anotheradvantage in the processing of oxygen and in doing aerobic work such as running.

RESPONSE TO HEAT

A woman’s response to heat stress differs somewhat from a man’s. Women sweat less, lose less heat throughevaporation, and reach higher body temperatures before sweating starts. Nevertheless, women can adaptto heat stress as well as men. Regardless of gender, soldiers with a higher level of physical fitness generallybetter tolerate, and adapt more readily to, heat stress than do less fit soldiers.

OTHER FACTORS

Knowing the physiological differences between men and women is just the first step in planning physicaltraining for a unit. Leaders need to understand other factors too.

Women can exercise during menstruation; it is, in fact, encouraged. However, any unusual discomfort,cramps, or pains while menstruating should be medically evaluated.

Pregnant soldiers cannot be required to exercise without a doctor’s approval. Generally, pregnant womenmay exercise until they are close to childbirth if they follow their doctors’ instructions. The Army agreeswith the position of the American College of obstetricians and Gynecologists regarding exercise andpregnancy. This guidance is available from medical authorities and the U.S. Army Physical Fitness School(USAPFS). The safety and health of the mother and fetus are primary concerns when dealing with exerciseprograms.

Vigorous activity does not harm women’s reproductive organs or cause menstrual problems. Also, physicalfitness training need not damage the breasts. Properly fitted and adjusted bras, however, should be wornto avoid potential injury to unsupported breast tissue that may result from prolonged jarring during exer-cise.

Although female soldiers must sometimes be treated differently from males, women can reach high levelsof physical performance. Leaders must use common sense to help both male and female soldiers achieveacceptable levels of fitness. For example, ability-group running alleviates gender-based differences betweenmen and women. Unit runs, however, do not.

A-1

Page 219: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

A P P E N D I X B

P O S I T I V E P R O F I L E F O R M

Figure B-1

B-0

Page 220: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

APPENDIX C

PHYSICAL FITNESS LOG

a diary ofSoldiers can use a physical fitness log to record their fitness goals. The log will serve ashow well they achieve them. Fitness goals are determined before the training begins. The results shouldclosely parallel or exceed the unit’s goals. While this is not a requirement, the log may also be used bycommanders and supervisors as a record of physical fitness training. Figure C-1 shows an example of aphysical fitness log that could be reproduced locally.

Figure C-1

C-1

Page 221: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

APPENDIX D

STATIONARY BICYCLE TEST

Only stationary bicycles which can be calibrated and which have mechanically adjustable resistances maybe used to test profiled soldiers on the 6.2-mile (l O-kilometer), alternate APFT event. Therefore, the eventsupervisor or scorer must be sure that the stationary bicycle can be accurately adjusted to ensure that thesoldier pedals against the correct resistance (force) of 2 kiloponds or 20 newtons. If the stationary bicyclecannot be properly calibrated and adjusted, the soldier may end up pedalling against a resistance which istoo great or not great enough. In either case, the test would not provide an accurate indication of the soldier’slevel of cardiorespiratory fitness.

The best type of stationary bicycle for testing has the following features:

• Calibration adjustment.

• Adjustable resistance displayed in kiloponds or newtons.

• Odometer which accurately measures the distance traveled in either miles or tenths of miles or in

kilometers and tenths of kilometers.

Examples of stationary bicycles which meet the above criteria are the mechanically braked Bodyguard990 and Monark 868. Such bicycles can be used to accurately measure a person’s rate of work or the totalamount of work. They are often called bicycle ergometers.

If the stationary bicycle has an odometer, the soldier must pedal 6.2 miles (10.0 kilometers or 10,000meters) against a resistance set at 2 kiloponds or 20 newtons. The test is completed when the soldier pedals6.2 miles (10.0 kilometers). He receives a “Go” if he is below or at the time allotted for his particular agegroup and gender. Care should be taken to ensure that, when using a stationary bicycle which measuresdistance in kilometers, the test is ended at 10 kilometers, not 6.2 kilometers.

There are many electrically operated, stationary bicycles (EOSBS) on the market and in gymnasiums onArmy installations. Most of them are designed for physical fitness training. Only a limited number of EOSBmodels are designed to accurately assess a person’s energy expenditure during exercise. Such EOSBS arerelatively expensive and are generally found in medical and scientific laboratories. Very few, if any, arefound in gymnasiums on Army installations.

Because most of the more common training EOSBS were not designed to accurately assess energyexpenditure, they should not be used for the alternate, cardiorespiratory APFT event.

For the sake of accuracy and ease of administration, soldiers designated to be tested on either of the twobicycle protocols should be tested using a moving bicycle IAW the guidelines provided elsewhere in this fieldmanuel. If the mechanical y- braked Bodyguard 990 or Monark 868 is used, however, the tester must ensurethat the equipment has been properly calibrated prior to each test.

D-0

Page 222: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

D-1

Page 223: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

APPENDIX E

SELECTING THE RIGHT RUNNING SHOE

Choosing a running shoe that is suitable for your particular type of foot can help you avoid some commonrunning- related injuries. It can also make running more enjoyable and let you get more mileage out of yourshoes.

Shoe manufacturers are aware that, anatomically, feet usually fall into one of three categories. Somepeople have “floppy” feet that are very “loose- jointed.” Because feet like this are too mobile, they “give”when they hit the ground. These people need shoes that are built to control the foot’s motion. At the otherextreme are people with “rigid” feet. These feet are very tight-jointed and do not yield enough upon impact.To help avoid impact-related injuries, these people need shoes that cushion the impact of running. Finally,the third type, or normal foot, falls somewhere between mobile and rigid. This type of foot can use anyrunning shoe that is stable and properly cushioned. Use the chart at Figure E-1 to help you determine whatkind of foot you have. Then, read the information on special features you should look for in a shoe.

When shopping for running shoes, keep the following in mind: • Expect to spend between $30 and $100 for a pair of good shoes. • Discuss your foot type, foot problems, and shoe needs with a knowledgeable salesperson. • Check the PX for available brands and their prices before shopping at other stores. • Buy a training shoe, not a racing shoe. • When trying on shoes, wear socks that are as similar as possible to those in which you will run. Also, be sure to try on both shoes. • Look at more than one model of shoe. • Choose a pair of shoes that fit both feet well while you are standing. • Ask if you can try running in the shoes on a non-carpeted surface. This gives you a feel for the shoes. • Carefully inspect the shoes for defects that might have been missed by quality control. Do the following: -Place the shoes on a flat surface and check the heel from behind to see that the heel cup is perpendicular to the sole of the shoe. -Feel the seams inside the shoe to determine if they are smooth, even, and well-stitched. -Check for loose threads or extra glue spots; they are usually signs of poor construction.

The shoes' ability to protect you from injury decreases as the mileage on them increases. Record thenumber of miles you run with them on a regular basis, and replace the shoes when they have accumulated500 to 700 miles even if they show little wear.

E-1

Page 224: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

Figure E-1

E-2

Page 225: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training
Page 226: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

F-2

Page 227: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

APPENDIX G

PERCEIVED EXERTION

The heart rate has traditionally been used to estimate exercise intensity. However, evidence shows thata person’s own perception of the intensity of his exercise can often be just as accurate as the heart rate ingauging his exercise intensity.

The scale in Figure G-1 lets a soldier rate his degree of perceived exertion (PE). This scale consists of. .numerical ratings for physical exercise followed by their associated descriptive ratings.

Figure G-1

To judge perceived exertion, estimate how difficult it feels to do the exercise. Do not be concernedwith any one single factor such as shortness of breath or work intensity. Instead, try to concentrate onthe total inner feeling of exertion.

Multiplying the rating of perceived exertion by 10 roughly approximates the heart rate during exercise.For example, a PE of 14, when multiplied by 10, equals 140.

Most soldiers with THRs between 130 and 170 BPM would exercise between a PE of 13 (somewhathard) and 17 (very hard).

Although either percent of maximum heart rate or perceived exertion may be used during exercise,the most valid method for calculating THR is percent HRR.

G-1

Page 228: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

APPENDIX H

THE MAJOR SKELETAL MUSCLES OF THE HUMAN BODY

Figure H-1

The iliopoas muscle (a hip flexor) cannot be seen as it lies beneath other muscles. It attaches to thelumbar vertebrae and the femur.

H-O

Page 229: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

GLOSSARY

ACAGRA ITAPFTARARNGARTEPATP

BCTBDUBPMBTBTMS

cCADCPRCPTCRCVSP

DADOD

EDREEIBEOSB

FFITTFMFTX

HDLHQHQDAHRR

IDIETIG

kph

Section 1: Acronyms and Abbreviations

Active Componentability group runadvanced individual trainingArmy Physical Fitness TestArmy regulationArmy National GuardArmy Training and Evaluation Programadenosine triphosphate

basic combat trainingbattle dress uniformbeats per minutebasic trainingBattalion Training Management System

centigradecoronary artery diseasecardiopulmonary resuscitationcaptaincardiorespiratorycardiovascular screening program

Department of the ArmyDepartment of Defense

emergency deployment readiness exerciseExpert Infantryman Badgeelectrically operated, stationary bicycle

Fahrenheitfrequency, intensity, time, typefield manualfield training exercise

high-density lipoproteinheadquartersHeadquarters, Department of the Armyheart rate reserve

identificationinitial entry traininginspector general

kilometers per hour

Glossary-1

Page 230: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

latLCELDL

MACOMMEDDACMETLMFTMHRminMOSMPHMRDAMRE

NCONCOICNGRNo.

OICOSTOSUT

PamPEPNFPREPTptsPU

RCrepRHRRICERMROTC

secSCUBASDTSOPSU

TB medTDATHRTMTOETRADOCTSTSP

latissimus dorsiload-carrying equipmentlow-density lipoprotein

major Army commandmedical department activitymission-essential task listmaster fitness trainermaximum heart rateminute(s)military occupational specialtymiles per hourmilitary recommended dietary allowancemeal, ready to eat

noncommissioned officernoncommissioned officer in chargeNational Guard regulationnumber

officer in chargeone-station trainingone-station unit training

pamphletperceived exertionproprioceptive neuromuscular facilitationpartner-resisted exercisephysical trainingpointspush-up

Reserve Componentrepetitionresting heart raterest, ice, compression, elevationrepetition maximumReserve Officers’ Training Corps

second(s)self-contained underwater breathing apparatusself development teststanding operating proceduresit-up

technical bulletin, medicaltable of distribution and allowancestraining heart ratetechnical manualtable of organization and equipmentU.S. Army Training and Doctrine Commandtimed settraining support package

Glossary-2

Page 231: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

U.S. United StatesUSAPFS United States Army Physical Fitness SchoolUSAR United States Army Reserve

V02max maximum oxygen consumption per minute

WBGTI wet bulb globe temperature indexWCF windchill factor

Section II: Termsextension

An increase in the angle between two bones in which a straightening movement occurs; the oppositeof flexion. For example, extension of the elbow involves an increase in the angle formed by the upperand lower arm as the arm straightens at the elbow.

flexionA decrease in the angle between two bones in which a bending movement occurs; the opposite of extension.

For example, flexion of the elbow involves a decrease in the angle formed by the lower and upper arm asthe arm bends at the elbow.

Glossary-3

Page 232: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

REFERENCES

SOURCES USED

These are the sources quoted or paraphrased in this publication.

ARMY REGULATIONS (ARs)

15-6 Procedures for Investigating Officers and Boards of Officers. May 1988.30-1 The Army Food Service Program. January 1985.350-15 Army Physical Fitness Program. November 1989.385-55 Prevention of Motor Vehicle Accidents. March 1987.

OTHER ARMY PUBLICATIONS

DOD Directive 1308.1 Physical Fitness and Weight Control Program. April 1981.FM 21-18 Foot Marches. June 1990.

DOCUMENTS NEEDED

These documents must be available to the intended users of this publication.

ARMY REGULATIONS (ARs)

40-501 Standards of Medical Fitness. July 1987.600-8-2 Suspension of Favorable Personnel Actions (Flags). October 1987.600-9 The Army Weight Control Program. September 1986.600-63 Army Health Promotion. November 1987.

OTHER ARMY PUBLICATIONS

FM 25-100 Training the Force. November 1988.NGR 40-501 Medical Examination for Members of the Army National Guard. October 1981.TRADOC Reg 350-6 Initial Entry Training (IET) Policies and Administration. August 1989.

READINGS RECOMMENDED

These readings contain relevant supplemental information.

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY PAMPHLETS (DA Pares)

28-9 Unit Level Recreational Sports. June 1973.350-15 Commander’s Handbook on Physical Fitness. October 1982.350-18 The Individual’s Handbook on Physical Fitness. May 1983.350-22 You and the Army Physical Fitness Test (APFT). September 1987.351-4 Army Formal Schools Catalog. August 1991.

References-O

Page 233: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

FIELD MANUALS (FMs)

21-150 Combative. December 1971.22-5 Drill and Ceremonies. December 1986.31-70 Basic Cold Weather Manual. April 1968.

OTHER ARMY PUBLICATIONS AND MATERIALS

AR 215-1 Administration of Army Morale, Welfare, and Recreation. February 1984.DA Form 705 Army Physical Fitness Test Scorecard. May 1987.DA Form 3349 Physical Profile. May 1986.Folio No. 1 “Training Facilities,” Corps of Engineers Drawing No. 28-13-95. Directorate of

Facilities Engineering.SB 10-260 Master Menu. December 1989.TB Med 507 Occupational and Environmental Health Prevention, Treatment, and Control of

Heat Injury. July 1980.TSP Physical Fitness Training - Total Fitness. July 1987.

TRAINING VIDEO TAPES (TVTS)

8-103 Standards for Determining Body Fat. 1986.21-76 Army Physical Fitness Test (APFT). 1986.21-191 Administration of the APFT. 1988.21-192 Partner-Resisted Exercises (PRE). 1987.21-218 Flexibility: The Truth About Stretching. 1989.21-203 Push-up/Sit-up Improvement. 1988.

References-1

Page 234: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

INDEX

This is a topical index organized alphabetically. Citations are to paragraph numbers.

ability group runningadvanced individual training, 1-10aerobic exercises; see exercises, aerobicaerobic fitness; see fitness, cardiorespiratoryaquatic exercise, 8-19 through 8-22Army Physical Fitness Test (APFT), 14-1 through 14-27

ability group running to prepare for, 1-10administration of, 14-2 through 14-8alternate events for, 14-20 through 14-27cardiovascular screening program for, 14-1command functions relating to, 1-2, 3duties of test personnel for, 14-8, 9evaluation of, 1-14, 15; 14-1failures, 1-12procedures for testing, 14-10, 11profiles in regard to, 14-20; see also profilepush-up as an event in, 14-11 through 14-14results of, 14-18, 19scorecard for, 14-3 through 14-7scores above maximum in, 14-19sequence of, 14-11 through 14-18site of, 14-9, 10sit-up as an event in, 14-14 through 14-16two-mile run as an event in, 14-17, 18

bicycle test (APFT event), 14-24 through 14-26bicycle ergometer test, stationary (APFT event), 14-22 through 14-24; D-Obicycling; see cyclingbody composition, 1-3; 5-0, 1; see also overweight soldiersbroom-ball hockey, 9-11, 12

calisthenics, 7-7 through 7-17cardiorespiratory fitness; see fitness, cardiorespiratorycircuits

designing of, 7-2, 3types of, 7-1

circuit training, 7-1 through 7-6sample circuits for, 7-3 through 7-6variables in, 7-1, 2

competitive fitness activities, 9-1 through 9-18cool-down, 1-7; 4-3; 8-22cross-country skiing, 2-15cycling, 2-14

index-O

Page 235: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

dehydration, 6-5; 12-3diet; see weight, diet and exercisedrills

conditioning, 7-17grass, 7-17 through 7-22guerilla, 7-23 through 7-26log, 8-13 through 8-18rifle, 8-11, 12

endurancecardiorespiratory; see fitness, cardiorespiratorymuscular; see muscular endurance and strength

environmental considerations, 12-0 through 12-4air pollution, 12-4altitude, 12-4cold environments, 12-2, 3dehydration, 12-3frostbite, 12-3heat injuries and symptoms, 12-1hot, humid environments, 12-1, 2hydration guidelines, 12-2hypothermia, 12-2temperature regulation, 12-0, 1windchill factor, 12-3

exercise principles, 1-4; 10-12, 13

exercises; see also drillsacquatic, 8-19 through 8-22aerobic, 2-0, 2-6 through 2-16aerobic (alternate forms), 2-13 through 2-13calisthenic, 7-7 through 7-17conditioning drills; see drills, conditioningcool-down after, 1-7; 4-3flexibility, 1 -3; 4-1 through 4-17guerilla; see drills, guerillainjuries related to, 13-1, 2muscle strengthening, 3-3 through 3-9muscular training chart, 3-36partner-resisted, 3-13 through 3-20rhythmic (with music), 2-15, 16warm-up before, 1-7; 4-2with equipment, 3-21 through 3-35without special equipment, 3-12

Fartlek training; see running, Fartlek trainingfat

body, 1-12, 13; 5-0, 1; see also overweight soldierssaturated, 6-3

Index-1

Page 236: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

fitnesscardiorespiratory (aerobic), 1 -3; 2-0 through 2-16components of, 1-3, 4conditioning phases for, 1-7 through 1 -9; 3-6, 7muscular, 3-1

fitness programs; see unit programfitness programs, types of

advanced individual training (AIT), 1-10individual, 1-11initial entry training (IET), 1-10; 11-0, 1special, 1-11, 12TOE and TDA units, 1-11unit, 1-9, 10

FITT factors, 1-4 through l-7; 2-1 through 2-6; 4-2flexibility, 1-3; 4-1 through 4-17flexibility exercises; see exercises, flexibilityfluid intake, 6-5, 6; 12-1frequency, intensity, time, type; see FITT factors

grass drills; see drills, grassguerilla drills; see drills, guerilla

handball and racquet sports, 2-15heart rate, components of

heart rate reserve (HRR), 1-6, 8; 2-3 through 2-6maximum heart rate (MHR), 2-2resting heart rate (RHR), 2-3, 4training heart rate (THR), 1-6, 8; (calculation) 2-2 through 2-6

initial entry training (IET), 1-1, 10, 15; 11-0, 1injuries, 2-6, 7; 7-7, 8; 13-1, 2interval training; see running, interval trainingintramural, 9- I through 9-5

log drills; see drills, log

master fitness trainer (MFT), 1-1, 2, 3, 9, 12, 13maximum heart rate; see heart rate, maximummuscle groups, 3-9 through 3-11muscle contractions (types), 3-1, 2muscular endurance and strength, 1-3; 3-1 through 3-36

age as a factor in, 1-13, 14exercise programs for, 3-12 through 3-36exercise selection for, 3-6principles of, 3-2 through 3-5key points regarding, 3-12training for, 1-5 through 1-7, 9, 13; 3-1 through 3-36

nine-ball soccer, 9-5 through 9-8nutrition

and fitness, 6-0 through 6-6for optimal physical performance, 6-3 through 6-6guidelines, 6-0 through 6-3in the field, 6-6

Index-2

Page 237: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

obstacle courses, types ofconditioning, 8-2 through 8-6confidence, 8-6 through 8-10safety precautions for using, 8-1, 2

olympics; see unit olympicsorienteering, 9-13 through 9-16overweight soldiers, 1-12, 13; see also fat, body

partner-resisted exercise; see exercises, partner-resistedperceived exertion, G-1phases of conditioning; see fitness, conditioning phasesphysical fitness log, C-Opositive profile form, B-1principles of exercise; see exercise principlesprofiles, 1-13; 14-20; B-1push-up; see APFT, push-uppushball, 9-7, 8pushball (strategy), 9-8 through 9-11

resistance training; see strength trainingrest, ice, compression, and elevation (RICE), 13-1resting heart rate; see heart rate, restingrifle drills; see drills, rifleroad marches, 2-11, 12; 11-1rope skipping, 2-15running

cross-country, 2-10Fartlek training, 2-9injuries; see injuriesinterval training, 2-8, 9last-man-up, 2-10shoes; see shoes, runningtechnique, 2-6

safety, 1-15; 3-6; 7-7; 8-1, 2; 9-16; 11-0, 1sexual differences, A-1, 2shoes, running (how to select), E-1, 2sit-up; see APFT, sit-upsoccer; see nine-ball soccerspeed play; see running, Fartlek trainingstrategy pushball; see pushball (strategy)strength training; see muscular endurance and strength, trainingstretching; see flexibility and exercises, flexibilityswim test (APFT event), 14-21, 22swimming, 2-14; see also exercise, aquatic

training heart rate; see heart rate, trainingtwo-mile run; see APFT, two-mile run

Index-3

Page 238: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

unit olympics, 9-17, 18unit program

activities and games for, 9-5 through 9-16development of, 10-1 through 10-13evaluation of, 1-14, 15sample of, 10-5 through 10-12types of, 1-10, 11

V O2max, calculation of, F-1, 2

walk (APFT event), 14-26, 27walking, 2-14, 15warm-up, 1-7; 4-2; 8-19weight (body); see also nutrition and fitness

Army standards for, 5-0, 1diet and exercise for proper, 5-1methods for evaluating, 5-0, 1programs for overweight soldiers, 1-12, 13

Index-4

Page 239: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training
Page 240: Us Army Field Manual - Physical Fitness Training

FM 21-2030 SEPTEMBER 1992

By Order of the Secretary of the Army

GORDON R. SULLIVANGeneral, United States Army

Chief of Staff

Official:

MILTON H. HAMILTONAdministrative Assistant to the

Secretary of the Army02361

DISTRIBUTION:

Active Arm y, USAR and ARNG: To be distributed In accordance with DA Form 12-11E,requirements for FM 21-20, Physical Fitness Training (Qty rqr block no. 0165).

•U.S. Government Printing Office: 1994 — 300-421/82850